NAVIGATION MAP OF COURSES OUTLINE Semester 1st Semester 2nd Semester 3rd Semester 4th
ENGLISH I ENGLISH IΙ BIOCHEMISTRY I BIOCHEMISTRY II
ΙNORGANIC CHEMISTRY
GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
INTRODUCTION TO NUTRITION
SCIENCE
NUTRITION EDUCATION
CELL BIOLOGY INTRODUCTION TO FOOD INDUSTRY II
FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
FOOD BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
INTRODUCTION TO FOOD INDUSTRY I
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY I
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGYII
MATHEMATICS STATISTICS -
QUANTITATIVE METHODS
FOOD CHEMISTRY I FOOD CHEMISTRY II
PHYSICS INFORMATICS-
DATABASES
HISTORY AND ANTHROPOLOGY
OF NUTRITION INTERSHIP
BIODIVERSITY - BIOTIC RESOURCES
Semester 5th Semester 6th Semester 7th Semester 8th FOOD
BIOCHEMISTRY NUTRITION AND
METABOLISM FOODSAFETYAND
QUALITY FOOD LEGISLATION
NUTRITION THROUGH THE LIFE
CYCLE
FOOD PROCESSING AND
PRESERVATION
DEGREE DISSERTATION
DEGREE DISSERTATION
FOOD ENGINEERING -
PHYSICAL PROCESSES
FOOD MICROBIOLOGY II ENGLISH III
FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY
TECHNOLOGY OF FOODS OF ANIMAL
ORIGIN PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATION & NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
MANAGEMENT AND EXPLOITATION
OF FOOD BY PRODUCTS
STRATEGIC MARKETING
TECHNOLOGY OF FOODS OF PLANT
ORIGIN
ORGANOLEPTIC EVALUATION
FUNCTIONAL FOODS
MOLECULAR BIOLOGY BIOSTATISTICS FOOD PACKAGING
MEDICINAL AND AROMATIC PLANTS
GLOBAL AGRIFOOD SYSTEM AND FOOD
CHAINS
APPLIED INFORMATICS FOR
FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
NUTRITION IN EXERCISE AND
PHYSICAL ACTIVITY
NUTRIOTION POLICIES AND
PUBLIC ACTIVITY
FOOD TOXICOLOGY DAIRY TECHNOLOGY
FOOD HYGIENE AND CONSUMER
BEHAVIOR
APPICULTURE AND RELATED
PRODUCTS
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN FOOD SCIENCE
BUSINESS PLANING FOR START UP
AGRI-FOOD SMEs
GENETICS AND NUTRITION
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF FOOD BORNE
DISEASES BIOPROCESSES FOR
THE DEVELOPMENT OF SUSTAINABLE
AND INNOVATIVE FOOD PRODUCTS
ENGLISH I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2850 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE ENGLISH I
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course,
e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND, SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
ENGLISH
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the
Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
After the successful completion of the course the students will be able:
to read and comprehend texts of general and scientific interest in the Englishlanguage, as well as to apply reading strategies according to the purpose of reading
to comprehend presentations, speeches and lectures and to keep constructive notes
to compose a text suitably, such as a description, a comparison, an analysis, a lab report, a scientific article
to use the English language according to purpose and audience
to study texts containing terminology relevant to their field of studies
to compose academic papers/ academic writing theory
to communicate in an English speaking environment
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Use of Information Technology Autonomous work Team work Working in an international environment Respect for difference and multiculturalism
(3) SYLLABUS
Grammar/Syntax:
Tenses
Definite and Indefinite Article
Countable and Uncountable Nouns
Conditionals
Passive voice
Indirect Speech Writing:
Types of writing
Composing a Paragraph
Composing medium‐length and long texts [article, papers, articles, discursive essays etc]
Vocabulary development:
Texts with terminology relevant to the field of studies
Texts of general interest relevant to the field of studies
(Listening activities of various types)
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching and for communication with students (aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr) Use of e‐mail for communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lecture attendance 39
Autonomous study 78
Final written exam 3
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Three‐hour written exam in English, that consists of:
Vocabulary activities [closed type]
Grammar activities [closed and open type]
Essay writing on a given topic /academicwriting theory
Reading comprehension with topic relevant tothe studied subject
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Neil O' Sullivan & James D. Libbin. "Career Paths: Agriculture". Express Publishing, 2011.
V. Pagoulatou‐Vlachou. “Intermediate Grammar and Exercises”. Express Publishing, 1991.
James Milton, Huw Bell & Peter Neville. “IELTS Practice Tests 1”. Express Publishing, 2002.
James Milton, Huw Bell & Peter Neville. “IELTS Practice Tests 2”. Express Publishing, 2003.
Laurie, G. Kirszner & Stephen, R. Mandell. “The Holt Handbook”. Harcourt Brace College Publishers, 1995.
‐ Related academic journals:
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1100 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE INORGANIC CHEMISTRY INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORIES 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The scope of the course is the comprehension of basic concepts pertaining to chemical theories of matter structure, basic matter properties and how these properties affect the physical‐chemical behavior of matter. The laboratory courses aim at familiarizing students with basic laboratory practices and training them with regard to fundamental calculations
involved in physical‐chemical phenomena (e.g. reactions in foods).
Following successful attendance of the course, the students will be in position to:
Understand basic principles of matter structure and behaviour
Understand basic chemical reactions
Carry out stoichiometric calculations
Possess basic knowledge on aqueous solutions and aqueous equilibrium
Comprehend basic notions of chemical kinetics
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
(3) SYLLABUS
Lecture course
Elements – Properties; Chemical equations, moles, stoichiometry; Reactions in aqueous solutions; Periodicity and electronic structure of atom; Ionic bonds – Chemistry of major groups; Covalent bonds and molecular structure; Thermochemistry – Chemical energy; Gases – Properties and behaviour; Liquids, solids and phase transitions; Solutions and their properties; Chemical kinetics; Chemical equilibrium; Aqueous equilibrium – Acids and bases; Applications of aqueous equilibrium.
Laboratory course
Safety – Good laboratory practice; Measurements – Instruments & devices; Chemical
equations, moles, stoichiometry; Reactions in aqueous solutions; Aqueous equilibrium – Acids & bases; Applications of aqueous equilibrium.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
FACE‐TO‐FACE. In laboratory courses, following a short
presentation of methodology, students perform
exercises using appropriate instruments/devices.
Furthermore, students practice scientific writing by
composing assays, in which they present and analyse
experimental results.
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures are supported by overhead projections and other audio material.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lecture attendance 39
Laboratory Exercises 39
Laboratory Reports 10
Autonomous Study 92
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of
The language of evaluation is Greek. Overall course grade comprises of lecture grade (50%) and laboratory grade (50%). Lecture course exams include multiple choice questions. Laboratory course exams include problem solving (50%) and assays (50%).
patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Brown, Lemay, Bursten, Murphy, Woodward, Stoltzfus. Chemistry – Central Science (13th edition), 2015,
CELL BIOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1150 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE CELL BIOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORIES 2.5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/images/files/syllabus/cell_biology.pdf
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Aim of this course is to present to students the basic subjects on the biology of a cell. Thus, this course provide the basis for the comprehension at molecular level of the differences
between prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells, the knowledge on the different organelles and intracellular compartments of an eukaryotic cell (nucleus, endoplasmatic reticulum, Golgi apparatus, mitochondria etc) and the function of each one, the knowledge on the common macromolecules (nucleic acids, proteins, sugars and lipids) existing in all types of cells, the structure and the biological role of nucleic acids (DNA, RNA), the chromosomes and the cell cycle, the mechanisms responsible for the accurate replication of genetic information and the DNA mismatch repair system, the flow of genetic information (transcription, translation and protein synthesis), the structure of cell membranes lipid bilayers and their functionality (selective permeability), the basic principles of cellular metabolism, the structure and function of mitochondria and the production of energy through oxidative phosphorylation, and finally the structure and function of chloroplasts and the production of energy through photosynthesis. Laboratory exercises deal with some basic techniques used in a biology laboratory and aim at the acquaintance by the students of both the theoretical background, as well as the practical part of these techniques. These techniques include: the observation of the cells under the light microscope, the fractionation of the cells with aim to extract the macromolecules and organelles contained inside them (homogenization, lysis and centrifugation), the isolation of myosin from skeletal muscle tissue, the spectrophotometry and protein assay using the Bradford method, and the DNA isolation.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making Working independently Team work Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory. 1. Introduction to cells (molecular organization of cells, prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell). 2. Chemical composition of cells (chemical bonds, molecules and macromolecules of cells). 3. Structure and function of proteins. 4. Structure and function of nucleic acids (DNA, RNA), chromosomes, cell cycle. 5. Mechanisms of DNA replication and repair. 6. The flow of genetic information (from DNA to proteins: how cells read their genomes). 7. Membrane structure and principles of membrane transportation. 8. Basic principles of cell metabolism. Energy production at mitochondria and at chloroplasts (oxidative phosphorylation and photophosphorylation).
Laboratory. 1. Observation of cells under the light microscope. 2. Centrifugation of yeast cells suspension and isolation of cells. 3. Isolation of myosin from beef skeletal muscle cells. 4. Spectrophotometry and quantitative protein determination by Bradford method. 5.Isolation of DNA from plant cells.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐Face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures (Theory and Laboratory) are done using PowerPoint presentations. All course notes are available to students at the moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform, communication with students is also made (announcements). Throughout the educational process, students sometimes watch educational videos (https://www.youtube.com/). The final exam is done online (multiple choice, correct / error, matching questions) through the moodle platform.
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory Exercises 32.5
Autonomous study 108.5
Course total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Student evaluation is done through final examinations (via computer). → Ques ons are in the form of: multiple choice (1 question with 4 possible answers,
of which only one answer is correct), correct / wrong (a suggestion where the student is
asked to judge whether its content is correct orincorrect)
matching (e.g. the organisms of a cell with theirnames).
Laboratory is examined independently of the theory of the course, while the final grade of the laboratory participates by 30% in the final grade of the course. A graduate grade (≥5) is required both in theory and in the laboratory so that a student can be considered
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
successful in the class. If one student succeeds in one of the two (theory, laboratory) then the next time (whenever) is examined only in what he/she failed. It is also possible for a student to be examined in the theory in 2 separate examinations → A 'and B' progress. In order to pass the theory through the 2 progressions it must have received at each degree ≥ 5. In this case, the final degree of the theory results from the average of the grades of 2 progressions. If a student fails to progress (and/or if he/she wishes to improve degree), he/she still has the right to be examined in the theory in the final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Molecular Biology of the Cell, Alberts B., Johnson A., Lewis J., Raff M. Roberts K., WalterP., Garland Science, Taylor and Francis Group.
2. Essential Cell Biology, Alberts B., Bray D., Hopkin K., Johnson A.D., Lewis J., Raff M.,Roberts K., Walter P., Johnson A., Garland Science, Taylor and Francis Group.
3. The Word of the Cell, Becker W.M., Kleinsmith L.J., Hardin J., Bertoni G.P., BenjaminCummings.
4. The Cell: A Molecular Approach, Cooper G.M., Hausman R.E., ASM Press, SinauerAssociates Inc..
‐ Related academic journals:
1. Frontiers in Cell and Developmental Biology (https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/cell‐
and‐developmental‐biology)
2. PLoS Biology (http://journals.plos.org/plosbiology/)
3. Journal of Structural Biology (https://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal‐of‐structural‐
biology/)
4. Cell (http://www.cell.com/)
5. Trends in Cell Biology (http://www.cell.com/trends/cell‐biology/home)
6. BMC Biology (https://bmcbiol.biomedcentral.com/)
INTRODUCTION TO THE FOOD INDUSTRY I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF ΤΗΕ ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1300 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO THE FOOD INDUSTRY I
(seminars – visits to industries)
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course,
e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES THEORY 2 4 LABORATORIES 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the
Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
PART I: SEMINARS:The Food & Nutrition seminars organized in both semesters of each academic year (I & II respectively), are a series of 2 hour lectures presented by invited speakers mainly from the private Greek business sector of food and nutrition, and some from the academic area. The
selection of the speakers and the subject of each lecture are chosen in collaboration with the Greek Food Industry Association based in Athens. This way a first level of collaboration with the Greek business sector is established at the first steps of the department’s development. The seminars are sponsored by local food companies. This is because the events are open to the public, developing thus an innovative vocational training course for the local entrepreneurs, mainly a good chance for innovative, new knowledge, and education. Each semester a series of 10 lectures are organized. The seminars are part of the department strategic objective, adapted already by the general assembly, for effective approach, and collaboration with the Greek food business sector, and for better, and open communication with the society. This out‐looking approach will support the department’s prestige to the Greek food industry, the approach to the local community, and overall the employment and career of the department’s future graduates. It is for this main reason that the seminars are organized in collaboration with the primary national business associations of the food sector, and with the support of a local food company each time. In the contents of the above strategic objective, the secondary goals of the organized seminars are the following: A) The promotion and the support of the department at local, and national level: The seminars have become an annual event (part of the specific course) which is the main, and first bridge of the department with the society and the food business sector. This is a concept adapted by many international similar departments, but not adapted yet by the majority of the Greek institutions. Therefore the understanding and the adaptation of the concept by the Greek private sector is expected to take some time, and requires special efforts B) The acquaintance of the academic community and the students with CEOs and key entrepreneurs of the Greek food business sector: The 1‐2 day visit of the selected speakers in the town of Myrina is be a good chance for: a) the promotion and presentation of the department its content, and its potentials, b) the acquaintance of the students with experts and high rant officials from the business sector, c) the promotion of the Lemnos’ island, and its traditional, unique food products, d) the acquaintance of the local entrepreneurs with national experts of the specific business sector, e) the possible collaboration of the department with the food enterprises via specific research project developed. C) The first knowledge of the students with selected, successful, innovative, business projects from the food and nutrition sector: The seminars have become popular to the students, and an annual event (a first year course) with different speakers each year is attended by all department’s students giving them the chance to be acquainted with many key experts of the Greek food business sector. Specific effort is made to have innovative, new, modern food and nutrition subjects in all lectures in order to ensure high attendance by the students and the local public too. Thus the students have the chance to be informed on the up to date subjects that preoccupy the food business world. D) The development of an academic environment enriched with parameters of innovation, and practical knowledge, in connection with the outside, real food and nutrition private sector: The modern approach and use of innovation a necessary tool today for any effort for success and excellence, including the academic, requires the use of innovative, educational methodologies, and effective transfer of the knowledge, especially when it is realistic, daily know how taken from the real food business world. Such an innovative approach is chosen to be used within the content of this seminar – type course. With this educational approach
the innovation, the transfer of knowledge by examples strengthens the innovation culture, and concept to the students, forthcoming employees and CEOs in the highly competitive private food and nutrition sector. PART 2: VISITS TO LOCAL FOOD COMPANIES: The student’s acquaintance with the food industry at this preliminary stage of the educational curriculum is implemented through ad hoc visits to local food factories, gaining of experience, and finally formulating a report for each visit separately. This way the student has the chance for the first time, and from the early stage of his studies to gain personal experience not only of the food production facilities, the process, and the quality control, but also of the entrepreneurial framework based on which each food company is based on. Within this framework the student is able to connect the gaining scientific knowledge through his academic years with the realistic, Greek environment of the food industry (a place where most likely he will work and perform afterwards). In addition this business contact, practical knowledge, and discussion with the entrepreneur and his staff gives the chance to the student to have a first understanding on how the business world operates, profits, and develops. How someone is becoming a successful entrepreneur, materializes his dreams and objectives, and operates a business. Thus the alternative for an entrepreneurship career is introduced to the student at this early academic stage. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Working independently Decision‐making Team work Criticism and self criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. SEMINARS:The exact program of each semesters’ seminar (10 lectures total) is organized and publicized at the beginning of each semester, so that the students, and the local entrepreneurs are aware of the weekly lecture, the speaker and the topic. All seminars are first announced at the announcement link of the department’s web site (www.fns.aegean.gr) and all past seminar programs are stored at a separate link named “seminars of food and nutrition” of the department/s website.
2. VISITS TO COMPANIES:Every weekly “laboratory” type of lesson (visit to a company) is compromised by two
phases: A’ PHASE: VISIT TO FOOD FACTORY OF 4‐5 HOUR DURATION: Each visit lasts approximately 4‐5 hours and includes the following stages:
1st stage: Introduction to the specific company, its history, its products, distribution networks etc.:
The entrepreneur, or someone from his staff implements an hour presentation to the students regarding data and other information related to the specific company
2nd stage: Visit to the production facilities of the company: Students visit the production facilities where the production processes are explained and
analyzed by specific staff of the company. 3rd stage: Production of selected products by the student themselves: The students have the chance, under the supervision of the staff, to prepare their owns
specific products 4th stage: Discussion on specific issues concerning the company and its products: The students, following the visit in the production area, have the chance to meet the
entrepreneur and his staff again and discuss with him any subject related to his company. They ask questions and receive appropriate answers. Thus the students gain an overview of the company its products, its finances, and the personality of the entrepreneur itself.
B’ PHASE: REPORTING: For every visit a report is prepared by a group of maximum 3 students. Every report
includes the following main items: 1. Introduction to the specific sector of business activity2. Company’s objectives3. Description of the production process4. Description of the products produced by the specific company5. The network used for the promotion and sale of the products6. The competition, and the competitive products in the market where the company is
operating7. Human resources utilized by the company8. ConclusionsEach year the items of the report do change depending on the food market conditions and
tendencies as well as the characteristics of the national and global crisis and the customers tendencies.
Each semester the students visit three local manufacturing food companies of different sectors, such as bakery, dairy, winery etc. Each year different companies are selected fo the course
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in searching for market information regarding the sectors of activity of the food business under study
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 26
Visits to the companies 52
Autonomous study 42
workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The students’ evaluation is based both on the evaluation of the seminars and the evaluation of the visits 1. SEMINARS:The students’ evaluation is based on their attendance of the seminars and their active participation during lecture time, and the exams at the end of the semester based on the contents of the 10 seminars 2. VISITS:The grading from the visits is based on the average of the grades that the student gets on the three reports which he submits at the end of the semester (1 for each visit). The reports are formulated by each group of maximum 3 students each. The overall grading is calculated based on: exam’s grade X 30% + grade from the reports X 70%
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Επιχειρηματικότητα, Deakins D., Freel M., Εκδόσεις Κριτική, μετάφραση, 2007.
2. Στρατηγική των επιχειρήσεων: Ελληνική και Διεθνής Εμπειρία, Παπαδάκης Β.,Εκδόσεις Μπένου, 2007.
3. International Business: A managerial prospective, FGriffin R.W., Pustay M.W.,Addison Wesley, 1995.
4. Επιχειρηματικότητα & Καινοτομίες, Γεωργαντάς Ζ., εκδόσεις Ανικούλα, 2003
5. Το επιχειρηματικό σχέδιο: πρακτικός οδηγός για τις ΜΜΕ, Κοκκόρης Θ., Γ’έκδοση, 2001.
6. Διεθνές εξαγωγικό Μάρκετινγκ, Πανηγυράκης Γ., Εκδόσεις Σταμούλη, 1992.
7. New food product development, Fuller, G.W., CRC press, 2005 (ISBN: 0‐8493‐1673‐1).
8. Introduction to food and agrobusiness management, ΠBaker G.A., Grunewald O.,Gorman W.D., Person Education, 2001 (ISBN: 0130145777).
9. Food processing, Connor J.M., John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 1997 (0471155152).
10. The Deming Management Method, Walton M., Management Books 2000 Ltd, 1992(1852521414)
11. Starting a business from home, ΚBarrow C., The Sunday Times, 2008
(9780749451943). 12. Food and Beverage Management, , Cousins J.A. Foskett D., Gillespie C., Pearson
Education Limited, 2001 (0582452716).
MATHEMATICS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1050 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE MATHEMATICS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
TUTORIALS 3
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes
The course objectives are the following for students
Basic knowledge in first principles of mathematics which are suitable forunderstanding physical, chemical and biological processes related to Food Scienceand Nutrition
Use of mathematical tools (especially from Calculus) required for the analysis andinterpretation of physical laws related to processes in Food Science and Nutrition
Analysis and synthesis of data using basic mathematical tools
Mathematical modelling of real phenomena and identification of parameters thataffect (both quantitative and qualitative) processes related to Food Science andNutrition
General Competences
Synthesis, analysis and mathematical interpretation of experimental data Research and analysis of information using mathematical tools Independent work
Decision making
(3) SYLLABUS
Part 1: Introduction to Linear Algebra and geometry: Algebra of Matrices, Determinants, Linear systems, Vector calculus Part2: Calculus: Real Functions, Limits, Continuity, differentiation, Taylor series, applications of derivatives, Integrals, methods of integration, application of integrals (e.g. area under curves). Ordinary Differential Equations (first and second order). Boundary and initial value problems. Higher order ordinary differential equations.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face to face:
Classroom (theory and exercises)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Course handouts and transparencies in pdf format Email communication between students and lecturer (e class)
TEACHING METHODS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Tutorials 39
Autonomous Study 72
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
.
Language of evaluation: Greek Method of evaluation Final exam paper
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: ‐ Related academic journals:
PHYSICS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1000 SEMESTER 1st
COURSE TITLE PHYSICS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes
The course objectives are the following for students
Basic knowledge in Physics suitable for understanding physical, chemical andbiological processes related to Food Science and Nutrition
The ability to process and analyse experimental data, using first principles of Physics
Knowledge of physical interpretation, mathematical modelling, analysis andevaluation of any phenomena and parameters describing processes related to FoodScience and Nutrition
General Competences
Synthesis, analysis and mathematical interpretation of experimental data Research and analysis of information using basic principles of Physics Independent work Decision making
(3) SYLLABUS
Kinematics, Dynamics, work, power, energy, momentum, angular momentum, analytical dynamics, material properties, Thermodynamics, optics, electricity, magnetism, quantum physics, atomic physics.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face to face:
Classroom (theory and exercises)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Course handouts and transparencies in pdf format Email communication between students and lecturer (Moodle)
TEACHING METHODS Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous Study 111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
.
Language of evaluation: Greek Method of evaluation Final exam paper
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
‐ Related academic journals:
ENGLISH II
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2900 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE ENGLISH II
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND, SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
ENGLISH
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
After the successful completion of the course the students will be able:
to read and comprehend texts of general and scientific interest in the Englishlanguage, as well as to apply reading strategies according to the purpose of reading
to comprehend presentations, speeches and lectures and to keep constructivenotes
to compose a text suitably, such as a description, a comparison, an analysis, a labreport, a scientific article
to use the English language according to purpose and audience
to study texts containing terminology relevant to their field of studies
to compose academic papers
to communicate in an English speaking environment
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Use of Information Technology Autonomous work Team work Working in an international environment Respect for difference and multiculturalism
(3) SYLLABUS
Grammar/Syntax:
Tenses
Indirect Speech
Passive voice
Types of subordinate clauses Writing:
Types of writing
Composing a Paragraph
Composing medium‐length and long texts [article, paper etc]
Composing a Summary
Composing a Lab Report Vocabulary:
Texts with terminology relevant to the field of studies
Texts of general interest relevant to the field of studies
(Listening activities of various types)
Presentation
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching and for communication with students (aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr) Use of e‐mail for communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 78
Final written exam 3
workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Three‐hour written exam in English, that consists of:
Reading Comprehension text
Vocabulary activities [closed type]
Grammar activities [closed type]
Short essay writing on a given topic/Academic writing theory
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Vassilia Kazamia‐Christou & Ioanna Ziaka. "English for Agricultural Sciences". University Studio Press, Thessaloniki, 2006.
V. Pagoulatou‐Vlachou. “Intermediate Grammar and Exercises”. Express Publishing, 1991.
John Morley, Peter Doyle & Ian Pople. "University Writing Course". Express Publishing, 2007.
Dimitris Siountris. “Word‐Perfect Proficiency”. Graphi elt publishing, 2004.
Mark Skipper. “Advanced grammar & vocabulary”. Express Publishing, 2002. ‐ Related academic journals:
GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES Undergraduate
COURSE CODE 1450 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate
components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total
credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORIES 2.5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES:
NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO
ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
http://www.fns.aegean.gr/images/files/syllabus/GENERAL_
MICROBIOLOGY.pdf
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of
the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Aim of this course is to help students understand the basic biology of microorganisms, that is the fundamental characteristics governing their structure and function. Thus, this course focuses on the primary characteristics of different types of microbial cells, on cell envelope of prokaryotes (bacteria), on nutrients (macronutrients, micronutrients and growth factors) which are essential for the nutrition of microorganisms, on the basic principles of cellular microbial metabolism and on the main catabolic reactions (aerobic, anaerobic respiration, fermentation) which produce energy, on the growth mode of microorganisms, on the main environmental parameters (temperature, pH, water activity, oxygen) affecting microbial growth, on the physical (e.g. heating, refrigeration, decrease of water activity) and on the chemical (e.g. antibiotics, antiseptics, disinfectants) methods which are used to control microbial growth, on the essential characteristics of viruses and on the viral growth cycle, on the eukaryotic microorganisms (fungi, algae, protozoa and helminths), on the human‐microbe interactions and finally on the mechanisms of pathogenesis of microorganisms. Following successive participation in laboratorial exercises, the students will be able: to observe microorganisms under the microscope (fixation and staining procedures), to prepare microbiological growth media, to safely manipulate microbial cultures (following the rules of aseptic technique), to isolate microorganisms in pure cultures and subsequently use them to inoculate fresh sterile media, to estimate the microbial load of a sample by different ways (e.g. enumeration using petri plates, turbidimetry), and finally to make a first estimation of the species of an unknown microorganism, based on some simple biochemical tests.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others…
Production of new research ideas …….
Decision‐making Working independently Team work Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory. 1. Introduction to microorganisms and microbiology. 2. General information on cell structure and microbial diversity. 3. Cell envelope, motility, surface and intracellular structures of prokaryotes. 4. Nutrition and metabolism of microorganisms. 5. Microbial growth and environmental effects. 6. Control of microbial growth (by physical and chemical methods). 7. Introduction to virology. 8. Eukaryotic microorganisms (fungi, algae, protozoa and helminths). 9. Human‐microbe interactions and microbial pathogenicity mechanisms. Laboratory. 1. Microscopic observation of microorganisms and Gram staining of bacteria. 2. Microbiological culture media: preparation and sterilization. 3. Aseptic technique, methods of inoculation and isolation of microorganisms. 4. Count bacterial cell suspension by the method of successive decimal dilutions and plate culture. 5. Biochemical tests of catalase and oxidase.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Lectures (Theory and Laboratory) are done using PowerPoint presentations. All course notes are available to students at the moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform, communication with students is also made (announcements). Throughout the educational process, students sometimes watch educational videos (https://www.youtube.com/). The final exam is done online (multiple choice, correct / error, matching questions) through the moodle platform.
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail.Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography,
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 32.5
Autonomous study 108.5
Course total 180 hours
tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
(30 h/ECTS)
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Student evaluation is done through final examinations (via computer). → Ques ons are in the form of: multiple choice (1 question with 4 possible
answers, of which only one answer is correct), correct / wrong (a suggestion where the
student is asked to judge whether its content is correct or incorrect)
matching (e.g. the organisms of a cell with their names).
Laboratory is examined independently of the theory of the course, while the final grade of the laboratory participates by 30% in the final grade of the course. A graduate grade (≥5) is required both in theory and in the laboratory so that a student can be considered successful in the class. If one student succeeds in one of the two (theory, laboratory) then the next time (whenever) is examined only in what he/she failed. It is also possible for a student to be examined in the theory in 2 separate examinations → A 'and B' progress. In order to pass the theory through the 2 progressions it must have received at each degree ≥ 5. In this case, the final degree of the theory results from the average of the grades of 2 progressions. If a student fails to progress (and/or if he/she wishes to improve degree), he/she still has the right to be examined in the theory in the final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, Willey J., Sherwood L., Woolverton C.,McGraw‐Hill Science.
2. Brock Biology of Microorganisms, Madigan Μ.Τ., Martinko J.M., Dunlap P.V., ClarkD.P., Pearson Education Benjamin Cummings.
3. Microbiology: An Introduction, Tortora G.J., Funke B.R., Case C.L., PearsonEducation Benjamin Cummings.
4. Foundations in Microbiology, Talaro K.P., McGraw‐Hill Science.
‐ Related academic journals:
1. FEMS Microbiology Reviews
(http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1111/(ISSN)1574‐6976)
2. Annual Review of Microbiology
(https://www.annualreviews.org/journal/micro)
3. The ISME Journal (https://www.nature.com/ismej/)
4. PLoS Microbiology (http://journals.plos.org/plosone/browse/microbiology)
5. Trends in Microbiology (http://www.cell.com/trends/microbiology/home)
6. Current Opinion in Microbiology
(https://www.journals.elsevier.com/current‐opinion‐in‐microbiology)
7. mBio (http://mbio.asm.org/)
8. Frontiers in Microbiology
(https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/microbiology)
9. Cellular Microbiology
(http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1111/(ISSN)1462‐5822)
10. Critical Reviews in Microbiology (http://www.tandfonline.com/loi/imby20)
11. BMC Microbiology (https://bmcmicrobiol.biomedcentral.com/)
12. Applied and Environmental Microbiology (http://aem.asm.org/)
13. Journal of Bacteriology (http://jb.asm.org/)
INTRODUCTION TO THE FOOD INDUSTRY II
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1650 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO THE FOOD INDUSTRY II
(seminars – visits to industries) INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES 2 4
VISITS TO LOCAL FOOD INDUSTRIES 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
PART I: SEMINARS: The Food & Nutrition seminars organized in both semesters of each academic year (I & II respectively), are a series of 2 hour lectures presented by invited speakers mainly from the private Greek business sector of food and nutrition, and some from the academic area. The selection of the speakers and the subject of each lecture are chosen in collaboration with the Greek Food Industry Association based in Athens. This way a first level of collaboration with the Greek business sector is established at the first steps of the department’s development. The seminars are sponsored by local food companies. This is because the events are open to the public, developing thus an innovative vocational training course for the local entrepreneurs, mainly a good chance for innovative, new knowledge, and education. Each semester a series of 10 lectures are organized. The seminars are part of the department strategic objective, adapted already by the general assembly, for effective approach, and collaboration with the Greek food business sector, and for better, and open communication with the society. This out‐looking approach will support the department’s prestige to the Greek food industry, the approach to the local community, and overall the employment and career of the department’s future graduates. It is for this main reason that the seminars are organized in collaboration with the primary national business associations of the food sector, and with the support of a local food company each time. In the contents of the above strategic objective, the secondary goals of the organized seminars are the following: A) The promotion and the support of the department at local, and national level: The seminars have become an annual event (part of the specific course) which is the main, and first bridge of the department with the society and the food business sector. This is a concept adapted by many international similar departments, but not adapted yet by the majority of the Greek institutions. Therefore the understanding and the adaptation of the concept by the Greek private sector is expected to take some time, and requires special efforts B) The acquaintance of the academic community and the students with CEOs and key entrepreneurs of the Greek food business sector: The 1‐2 day visit of the selected speakers in the town of Myrina is be a good chance for: a) the promotion and presentation of the department its content, and its potentials, b) the acquaintance of the students with experts and high rant officials from the business sector, c) the promotion of the Lemnos’ island, and its traditional, unique food products, d) the acquaintance of the local entrepreneurs with national experts of the specific business sector, e) the possible collaboration of the department with the food enterprises via specific research project developed. C) The first knowledge of the students with selected, successful, innovative, business projects from the food and nutrition sector: The seminars have become popular to the students, and an annual event (a first year course) with different speakers each year is attended by all department’s students giving them the chance to be acquainted with many key experts of the Greek food business sector. Specific effort is made to have innovative, new, modern food and nutrition subjects in all lectures in order to ensure high attendance by the students and the local public too. Thus the students have the chance to be
informed on the up to date subjects that preoccupy the food business world. D) The development of an academic environment enriched with parameters of innovation, and practical knowledge, in connection with the outside, real food and nutrition private sector: The modern approach and use of innovation a necessary tool today for any effort for success and excellence, including the academic, requires the use of innovative, educational methodologies, and effective transfer of the knowledge, especially when it is realistic, daily know how taken from the real food business world. Such an innovative approach is chosen to be used within the content of this seminar – type course. With this educational approach the innovation, the transfer of knowledge by examples strengthens the innovation culture, and concept to the students, forthcoming employees and CEOs in the highly competitive private food and nutrition sector. PART 2: VISITS TO LOCAL FOOD COMPANIES: The student’s acquaintance with the food industry at this preliminary stage of the educational curriculum is implemented through ad hoc visits to local food factories, gaining of experience, and finally formulating a report for each visit separately. This way the student has the chance for the first time, and from the early stage of his studies to gain personal experience not only of the food production facilities, the process, and the quality control, but also of the entrepreneurial framework based on which each food company is based on. Within this framework the student is able to connect the gaining scientific knowledge through his academic years with the realistic, Greek environment of the food industry (a place where most likely he will work and perform afterwards). In addition this business contact, practical knowledge, and discussion with the entrepreneur and his staff gives the chance to the student to have a first understanding on how the business world operates, profits, and develops. How someone is becoming a successful entrepreneur, materializes his dreams and objectives, and operates a business. Thus the alternative for an entrepreneurship career is introduced to the student at this early academic stage.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Working independently Decision‐making Team work Criticism and self
criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. SEMINARS: The exact program of each semesters’ seminar (10 lectures total) is organized and publicized at the beginning of each semester, so that the students, and the local entrepreneurs are aware of the weekly lecture, the speaker and the topic. All seminars are first announced at the announcement link of the department’s web site (www.fns.aegean.gr) and all past seminar programs are stored at a separate link named “seminars of food and nutrition” of the department/s website.
2. VISITS TO COMPANIES: Every weekly “laboratory” type of lesson (visit to a company) is compromised by
two phases: A’ PHASE: VISIT TO FOOD FACTORY OF 4‐5 HOUR DURATION: Each visit lasts approximately 4‐5 hours and includes the following stages: 1st stage: Introduction to the specific company, its history, its products, distribution
networks etc.: The entrepreneur, or someone from his staff implements an hour presentation to
the students regarding data and other information related to the specific company
2nd stage: Visit to the production facilities of the company: Students visit the production facilities where the production processes are explained
and analyzed by specific staff of the company. 3rd stage: Production of selected products by the student themselves: The students have the chance, under the supervision of the staff, to prepare their
owns specific products 4th stage: Discussion on specific issues concerning the company and its products: The students, following the visit in the production area, have the chance to meet the
entrepreneur and his staff again and discuss with him any subject related to his company. They ask questions and receive appropriate answers. Thus the students gain an overview of the company its products, its finances, and the personality of the entrepreneur itself.
B’ PHASE: REPORTING: For every visit a report is prepared by a group of maximum 3 students. Every report
includes the following main items: 1. Introduction to the specific sector of business activity 2. Company’s objectives 3. Description of the production process 4. Description of the products produced by the specific company 5. The network used for the promotion and sale of the products 6. The competition, and the competitive products in the market where the
company is operating 7. Human resources utilized by the company 8. Conclusions Each year the items of the report do change depending on the food market
conditions and tendencies as well as the characteristics of the national and global crisis and the customers tendencies.
Each semester the students visit three local manufacturing food companies of different sectors, such as bakery, dairy, winery etc. Each year different companies are selected fo the course
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in searching for market information regarding the sectors of activity of the food business under study
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 26
Visits to the companies
52
Autonomous Study 42
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work,
The students’ evaluation is based both on the evaluation of the seminars and the evaluation of the visits 1. SEMINARS:The students’ evaluation is based on their attendance of the seminars and their active participation during lecture time, and the exams at the end of the semester based on the contents of the 10 seminars 2. VISITS:The grading from the visits is based on the average of the grades that the student gets on the
essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
three reports which he submits at the end of the semester (1 for each visit). The reports are formulated by each group of maximum 3 students each. The overall grading is calculated based on: exam’s grade X 30% + grade from the reports X 70%
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Επιχειρηματικότητα, Deakins D., Freel M., Εκδόσεις Κριτική, μετάφραση, 2007.
2. Στρατηγική των επιχειρήσεων: Ελληνική και Διεθνής Εμπειρία, Παπαδάκης Β., Εκδόσεις Μπένου, 2007.
3. International Business: A managerial prospective, FGriffin R.W., Pustay M.W., Addison Wesley, 1995.
4. Επιχειρηματικότητα & Καινοτομίες, Γεωργαντάς Ζ., εκδόσεις Ανικούλα, 2003
5. Το επιχειρηματικό σχέδιο: πρακτικός οδηγός για τις ΜΜΕ, Κοκκόρης Θ., Γ’ έκδοση, 2001.
6. Διεθνές εξαγωγικό Μάρκετινγκ, Πανηγυράκης Γ., Εκδόσεις Σταμούλη, 1992. 7. New food product development, Fuller, G.W., CRC press, 2005 (ISBN: 0‐
8493‐1673‐1). 8. Introduction to food and agrobusiness management, ΠBaker G.A.,
Grunewald O., Gorman W.D., Person Education, 2001 (ISBN: 0130145777). 9. Food processing, Connor J.M., John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 1997 (0471155152). 10. The Deming Management Method, Walton M., Management Books 2000
Ltd, 1992 (1852521414) 11. Starting a business from home, ΚBarrow C., The Sunday Times, 2008
(9780749451943). 12. Food and Beverage Management, , Cousins J.A. Foskett D., Gillespie C.,
Pearson Education Limited, 2001 (0582452716).
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1400 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate
components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are
awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND, SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES:
NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO
ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
https:://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course /view.php?id=403
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
With the successful completion of the course of Organic Chemistry: Students acquire knowledge on the types of bonds in carbon compounds, the structure of organic compounds, the main classes of organic molecules, the organic molecule nomenclature Students understand how organic compounds react through specific mechanisms, as well as the relationship between structure and activity of organic compounds. Students have the skills to interpret and anticipate chemical and biochemical reactions in various systems.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Retrieve, analyse and synthesise data and information, with the use of necessary technologies Work autonomously Work in teams Design and management of experiments Be critical and self‐critical Advance free, creative and causative thinking work in a multidisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS
THEORY ‐Chemal structure, types of bonds and functional groups of organic compounds ‐ Saturated, unsaturated and cyclic hydrocarbons ‐ General reactions categories ‐ Stereochemistry of organic compounds ‐ Mechanisms of organic reactions ‐ Substitution and Elimination ‐ Arromaticity ‐ Phenols ‐ Alcohols and thiols ‐ Ethers and sulphides ‐ Aldehydes ‐ Ketones ‐ Carboxylic acids ‐ Amines LABORATORY ‐Physical separation and purification methods‐Filtration ‐Physical methods of separation and purification‐Extraction ‐ Physical separation and purification methods ‐ Recrystallization & melting point‐ Natural separation and purification methods ‐ Distillation & boiling point ‐ Visible Spectrophotometry (VIS)
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Multimedia presentations and presentation software usage Email communication with students Support of Learning Process via the electronic moodle platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Laboratory reports 20
Autonomous Study 82
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Students are evaluated in Greek language through final written examination with short‐answer and/or open ended and/or problem solving and/or multiple‐choice questions on the theory of the course. The degree of this final examination counts for 70% of the final grade of the course Students are assessed by written laboratory reports on the understanding of the principle of the methodology used, the presentation and processing of the experimental data and the evaluation of the result. The average of the grades of laboratory reports counts for 15% of the final grade of the course. Students are also evaluated on the laboratory practice through a final written examination with open‐ended and/or problem solving and/or multiple‐choice questions. The grade of this final examination counts for 15% of the final grade of the course
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Organic Chemistry, John McMurry, Crete University Pub, 2015 (translated in
Greek)
Organic Chemistry for Life Sciences, David Klein, Utopia Pub., 2015
(Translated in Greek)
Organic Chemistry, Wade JR, Tziola Pub., 2011 (Translated in Greek)
Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments, Schoffstall A.,Gaddis
B.,Druelingeer M., Papazisis Pub., 2012 (Translated in Greek)
‐ Related academic journals:
European Journal of Organic Chemistry
The journal of Organic Chemistry
INFORMATICS-DATABASES
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1500 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE INFORMATICS‐DATABASES
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 2 5
LABORATORIES 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://eclass.aegean.gr/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The purpose of the course is to familiarize students with the parts of a P/C as well as with widely used modern computer systems and programs such as word processor, spreadsheets and databases. After the end of the learning process, students will have comprehend the basic parts of a computer, have acquired basic skills of using the word processor, spreadsheets and databases which they can use in food science.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS
The aim of the lesson is the acquisition of basic meanings of Informatics which help students to comprehend better the subject of their studies. This lesson provides all the necessary knowledge for the understanding of basic terms of word processor and spreadsheets emphasizing to databases subjects Course Syllabus: Basic principles of Word Processor and Spreadsheets, data definition and characteristics, database, database management system (DMS), database models, principles of Entity‐Relationship diagram (ERD), case studies, principles of relational model, relational databases diagram, operations and limitations of relational model, relational algebra, transformation of ERD into relational database, algorithm and application, SQL programming, definition, importing, deleting, modifying, searching data with SQL, normalization, Introduction to Access, creation of tables, connection of tables, importing, deleting, modifying data, queries of selection, deletion, and information, forms, reports Laboratory Syllabus: Laboratory exercises (databases) which include database creation, searching data, data management, forms, reports, laboratory exercises (Word Processor) which include opening, processing, saving, formatting, printing,
previewing documents, tables, symbols, equations, diagrams, laboratory exercises (Spreadsheets) which include opening, processing, saving, formatting, printing, previewing spreadsheets, formulas, charts
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐Face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 26
Laboratory exercises 26
Autonomous Study 98
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory
20% (Growth topic rating) + 80% (Degree of final examination, 40% Laboratory+40% Theory) or 100% Degree of final examination (50% Laboratory+50% Theory)
work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: E. Kexris, Relational databases, theory and laboratory exercises, Kritiki Publications, 2005 M. Xenos, D. Christodoulakis, Introduction to databases, Papasotiriou Publications, 2002 D. Dervos, Introduction to database systems, Tziolas Publications, 1995 A . Silberschatz, H. Korth, S. Sudarshan, Database system concepts, Giourdas Publications, 2003 C. D. Frye, Step by step, Microsoft Excel 2007, Klidarithmos Publications, 2007
‐ Related academic journals:
STATISTICS – QUANTITATIVE METHODS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1550 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE STATISTICS – QUANTITATIVE METHODS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES COURSE 3 5
LABORATORIES 2
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NONE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes
The course objectives are the following for students
Basic knowledge in first principles of statistics suitable for Food Science andNutrition
Understanding of statistics terms and methodology for use in experimental studies
Expertise in the use of statistical software packages
General Competences
Research and analysis of data using statistical methods Independent work and as a team work Decision making
(3) SYLLABUS
A) Statistics for Food and Nutrition Scientists Part 1: Proportions, rates of change, index numbers in Statistics: Proportions, sensitivity analysis, reliability, rates of change. Part2: Descriptive statistics‐Organize, analyse, interpret and summarize datasets Ordered frequency table, Grouping data into classes, frequency histogram and polygon, cumulative frequency charts, measures of central tendency, measures of variability, measures of position. Part 3: Introduction to probability Introduction to set theory, sample spaces, events in probability theory, computing the probability of an event, basic probability laws. Probability distributions of continuous and discrete random variables. Random variables, probability distribution and cumulative distribution function of a discrete random variable, binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, probability density function and cumulative distribution function of a continuous random variable, normal distribution, standard normal distribution. Part 4: Statistical inference, point estimation and confidence intervals Sampling distribution, point estimators of the unknown parameters of a population, properties of point estimators (Unbiased Minimum Variance, sufficiency, completeness, consistency), confidence interval estimators, controlling the range of a confidence interval estimator by choosing the appropriate size of the sample. Significance testing, parametric and non – parametric tests, test of normality, correlation, regression, anova of single variable Part 5: Error Analysis B) Statistics in personal computers
Use of statistical methods for data analysis using the statistical software package SPSS. Descriptive statistics, t test of dependent and independent samples, one way anova, pearson correlation coefficient, simple linear regression, chi square test. The data are related to Food Science and Nutrition. Lab exercises
1. Data collection from and by students related to Food Science and Nutrition (e.g. height, weight, nutrition habits e.t.c.)
2. Descriptive statistics for scale (quantitative variables) 3. Descriptive statistics for nominal and ordinal variables 4. Graphical representation of correlations among variables 5. Normality tests 6. Chi square test 7. T test of two samples (independent and dependent) 8. One way ANOVA 9. Pearson correlation and simple linear regression 10. Full statistical analysis of data collected from exercise 1.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
Classroom (theory and exercises)
Lab work (practice with the statistical software
package SPSS)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Course handouts and transparencies in pdf format Email communication between students and lecturer (eclass)
TEACHING METHODS Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory εxercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 65
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
.
Language of evaluation: Greek Method of evaluation
Final exam paper (70% of total mark)
Obligatory presence at labs (at least) 90% oflabs
Average of ten lab exercises (30% of totalmark)
Evaluation criteria are presented and analysed to students at start of semester
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
‐ Related academic journals:
BIODIVERSITY – BIOTIC RESOURCES
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1200 SEMESTER 2nd
COURSE TITLE BIODIVERSITY – BIOTIC RESOURCES
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/348‐
biodiversity
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Knowledge of biodiversity’s main characteristics.
Comprehension of the role of biodiversity on ecosystem functioning and theconsequences of its decrease in human society.
Understanding of the significance and value of biodiversity emphasizing onbiotic resources conservation.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology.
Adapting to new situations.
Decision‐making.
Working in an international environment.
Working in an interdisciplinary environment.
Production of new research ideas.
Respect for difference and multiculturalism.
Respect for the natural environment.
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking.
(3) SYLLABUS
During the course are given weekly lectures that include: 1) What is biodiversity and biotic resources? Definitions and a brief history of the
terms. 2) The classification of living organisms and their role in ecosystem functioning.3) Biodiversity through time and its fluctuations.
4) Spatial distribution of biodiversity.5) Threats to biodiversity from human activities.6) Threats to biodiversity from climate change.7) The current state of biodiversity on the planet and the “biodiversity hotspots”.8) Biological diversity in the Mediterranean and Greece, current‐status and
threats.9) The importance and benefits of biodiversity and biotic resources.10) The direct utility value of biotic resources and approaches on their use.11) The indirect utility value of biodiversity and its ecosystem services.12) Actions for biodiversity conservation. The critical international conventions on
biological diversity.13) Areas under protection. European network of protected areas (Natura 2000).
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Yes, using a projector, internet access and viewing of audiovisual material (documentaries)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Essays 24
Autonomous Study 54
Final written examination
3
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
‐ Final written examination (80% of the final grade), in Greek, with questions of: (a) Short‐answer and
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(b) Multiple choices. ‐ Written Assignment (20% of the final grade). Detailed instructions for the teaching material and evaluation process are provided on the web‐platform https://eclass.aegean.gr
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1. Gaston K.J., Spicer J.I. (2008) Biodiversity: an introduction (2nd edition, Editing
in Greek: C. Chintiroglou and D. Vafeidis). University Studio Press, ISBN: 9601216871, 242 pages
2. Primack R., Diamantopoulos G., Arianoutsou M., Danielidis D., Valakos S., Pafilis P., Pantis I.D. (2009) Conservation and protection of biodiversity. Odysseus Publications, ISBN: 9789608771451, 470 pages (in Greek)
3. Whittaker R.J., Fernandez‐Palacios J.M. (translation: Vakalis V., editing: Sfenthourakis S.) (2009) Island Biogeography: Ecology, Evolution and Conservation. Crete University Press, ISBN: 978960524283Χ, 416 pages (in Greek)
4. Wilson E.O. (1992) The diversity of life. Penquin, 406 pages 5. Loreau M., Naeem S., Inchausti P. (eds) (2002) Biodiversity and ecosystem
functioning: synthesis and perspectives. Oxford University Press, Oxford, 294 pages
6. Blondel J., Aronson J. (1999) Biology and Wildlife of the Mediterranean region. Oxford University press, Oxford
7. Leveque J., Mounolou J‐C. (2003) Biodiversity. John Wiley & Sons, 284 pages ‐ Related academic journals: 1. Environmental Management 2. Ecology 3. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment 4. Conservation Biology 5. Ecological Applications 6. Plos One
BIOCHEMISTRY I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1750 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE BIOCHEMISTRY I
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORIES 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐
15/66‐syllabus‐bioximiai
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to present the main classes of biomacromolecules; e.g. proteins and enzymes, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids. Students are expected to acquire the ability to recognize, classify and nomenclate the main classes of biomacromolecules. Special emphasis is laid on the comprehension of the structural characteristics and physicochemical properties of biomacromolecules, underlining also the most special structural and physicochemical features that affect their biological activity. Students are expected to utilize any knowledge already acquired in previous semesters in order to achieve full understanding of the structure and function of biomacromolecules. The knowledge gained during this course is essential in order for the understanding of the biochemical – metabolic processes occurring in
the molecular basis of life to be achieved. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Working independently
Team work
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory ‐Aminoacids/peptides/proteins: Protein structure and function overview, from the primary to the quaternary protein structure, biological function of specific proteins (myoglobin, hemoglobin, α‐keratin, collagen, elastin). ‐Carbohydrates: Classification‐nomenclature‐structural features‐physicochemical properties, biological function of specific carbohydrates (monosaccharides‐polysaccharides‐homopolysaccharides‐heteropolysaccharides). ‐Lipids: Classification‐nomenclature‐structural features‐physicochemical properties, biological function of specific lipids (phospholipids‐ glycolipids‐lipoproteins), composition and biological function of cellular membranes. ‐Nucleic acids DNA and RNA: Structural features and biological function, molecular basis on the flow of genetic information, gene mutations‐DNA repair systems overview. ‐Enzymes and Coenzymes: Mechanisms of action, specificity and biological function, classification and nomenclature, enzyme kinetics, reversible and irreversible enzyme inhibition, regulation of enzymatic activity. Laboratory ‐Acid‐base properties of aminoacids, titration of glycine, determination of ionization constant and isoelectric point. ‐Detection reactions of aminoacids: ninhydrin reaction, xanthoprotein reaction, cysteine reaction, arginine reaction, tryptophan reaction ‐Aminoacids separation by chromatographic methods: thin layer chromatography, ion exchange column chromatography ‐Absorption of ultraviolet light by aromatic aminoacids: Basic principles of spectrophotometry of visible and ultraviolet light, absorption spectra of tyrosine, standard curve of tyrosine and analytical determination of tyrosine concentration.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory εxercises 26
Laboratory reports 20
Autonomous Study 95
Course total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Open‐ended questions, laboratory exercises, public presentation.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Α. Lehninger, D. Nelson, M.M. Cox, D.L. Nelson (2007) “Lehninger ‘s Principles ofBiochemistry” 4th Edition, W.H. Freeman. ISBN: 9780716743392 . 2) J. Koolman, K.H. Roehm (2005) “Color Atlas of Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Thieme.ISBN: 1588902471. 3) J.M. Berg, J.L. Tymoczko, L. Stryer (2002): “Biochemistry” 5th Edition, W.H.Freeman. ISBN: 0716730510. 4) Murray RK, Botham KM, Rodwell VW, Bender DA, Kennelly PJ, Weil PA (2011).Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry. Editing of Greek Edition: A.G. Papavasileiou. Medical Publication P.C. Paschalidis. ISBN: 9780071625913. 5) Zubay, W.W. Parson, D.E. Vance (1999), “Principles of Biochemistry Ι‐ΙΙΙ”. Editing ofGreek Edition: C.E. Sekeris, A.T. Kalafoutis, Medical Publication P.C. Paschalidis. ISBN: 9607398645.
INTRODUCTION TO NUTRITION SCIENCE
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1950 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO NUTRITION SCIENCE
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ΝΟ
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/355‐
introduction‐nutrition https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/fns127/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of human nutrition issues, backed upby advanced science textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition. • They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate topracticing the profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientist and have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and nutrition advice. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both
qualified and non‐specialized people about human nutrition. • They have developed those general knowledge acquisition skills that they need tocontinue in further studies with a high degree of autonomy, by studying the specific aspects of nutrition science. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on nutrition science issues, which implies a criticalunderstanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required tosolve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of human nutrition. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providingnutrition advice.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aim at:
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutritionscience, with the use of the necessary technology
Adapting to new situations about nutrition science
Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues
Working independently
Team work about nutrition
Working in an international environment
Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management
Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Respect for the natural environment
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity togender issues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
The object of this course is to introduce students in the science of nutrition as a biomedical science. Particular objects of the course include the following: 1. Recommendations on nutrient intakes.
2. Energy: energy requirements in normal conditions, basal metabolism, energycost of physical activity, energy content of foods. 3. Macronutrients: basic principles of digestion, absorption, metabolism and usein humans. Dietary sources, recommendations, deficiencies. 4. Micronutrients: The role of vitamins and minerals in maintaining normalfunctioning of the body. Dietary sources, recommendations, deficiencies, toxicity. 4. Models of optimal nutrition.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer, mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Essays 10
Autonomous Study 101
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Assessment of the course is done through a written examination and through a teamwork assessment. The aim of the work is to choose from a relevant list of topics and the development of a cutting‐edge nutrition and health topic and its presentation in the course. The participation of the written exam in the final score is 70% and the assessment of the work 30%. Both grades (written examination and work evaluation) should greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0).
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Basic Nutrition, L.A. Smolin, M.B. Grosvenor, Chelsea House Publications, 2004, (ISBN‐10: 0791078507).
Nutrition: Concepts and Controversies, F. Sizer, E. Whitney, Brooks Cole, 12th edition, 2010, (ISBN‐10: 0538734949).
‐ Related academic journals:
European Journal of Nutrition Journal of Nutrition International Journal of Nutrition
FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT
DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES
UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 1800 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 7
LABORATORIES 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background, special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES:
GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION
and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO
ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
course website (url)
http://www.fns.aegean.gr/images/files/syllabus/food_microbiology_i.pdf
(2) learning outcomes
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Aim of this course is to help students understand the outstanding importance of microorganisms for foods (mainly with regard to their negative impact: spoilage and cause of foodborne diseases). Thus, this course focuses on the predominant types of microorganisms in foods (bacteria, molds, yeasts, protozoa and viruses), on their sources, on the microflora
of various food types, on the characteristics of microbial growth in foods (sigmoidal growth curve of batch culture) and the phenomena which may be observed during it (diauxie, mutualism, synergism, antagonism), on the intrinsic (e.g. nutrients, water activity) and extrinsic (e.g. temperature, relative humidity of the environment) parameters affecting microbial growth in foods, on the metabolism (aerobic, anaerobic respiration and fermentation) of principal food components (carbohydrates, proteins and lipids) by microorganisms, on the important factors of microbial food spoilage, on the indicators (sensory, microbiological and chemical) of microbial food spoilage and the main microorganisms associated with the spoilage of various food types, on the significance of foodborne diseases for the public health and economy of a country, on the types of microbial foodborne diseases (foodborne intoxications, infections and toxicoinfections) and the pathogenic microorganisms associated with each type and finally on the microbial indicators used to assess the safety of various foods (e.g. coliforms, enterococci). Laboratorial exercises are designed to help students better understand some of the key questions addressed by the theory of the course. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making Working independently Team work Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory. 1. History and importance of food microbiology. Characteristics of predominant microorganisms in foods. 2. Important microorganisms in foods. 3. Sources of microorganisms in foods. 4. Microbiological flora of various foods. 5. Characteristics of microbial growth in foods. 6. Factors influencing microbial growth in food. 7. Microbial metabolism of food components. 8. Important factors in microbial food spoilage. 9. Food spoilage by microbial enzymes. 10. Indicators of microbial food spoilage and spoilage of main food types. 11. Important factors in foodborne diseases. 12. Important foodborne pathogenic bacteria. 13. Microorganisms indicators of enteric pathogens. Laboratory. 1. Effect of temperature on microbial growth and death (calculation of decimal reduction time). 2. Indirect determination of microbial population by (absorbance) turbidity measurements. 3. Determination of sanitary quality of milk through the enumeration of coliforms and biochemical tests for gas and indole production. 4. Isolation of the pathogenic bacteria of salmonella from a food by means of enrichment and biochemical identification through the Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) test. 5. Calculation of the minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) of a chemical antimicrobial agent by means of the dilution test tube method.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Lectures (Theory and Laboratory) are done using PowerPoint presentations. All course notes are available to students at the moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform, communication with students is also made (announcements). Throughout the educational process, students sometimes watch educational videos (https://www.youtube.com/). The final exam is done online (multiple choice, correct / error, matching questions) through the moodle platform.
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory Exercises 39
Tutorials 20
Autonomous Study 112
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
210 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Student evaluation is done through final examinations (via computer).
→ Ques ons are in the form of: multiple choice (1 question with 4 possible answers,
of which only one answer is correct), correct / wrong (a suggestion where the student is
asked to judge whether its content is correct or incorrect)
matching (e.g. the organisms of a cell with their names).
Laboratory is examined independently of the theory of the course, while the final grade of the laboratory
participates by 30% in the final grade of the course. A graduate grade (≥5) is required both in theory and in the laboratory so that a student can be considered
successful in the class. If one student succeeds in one of the two (theory, laboratory) then the next time
(whenever) is examined only in what he/she failed. It is also possible for a student to be examined in the
theory in 2 separate examinations → A 'and B' progress. In order to pass the theory through the 2
progressions it must have received at each degree ≥ 5. In this case, the final degree of the theory results from
the average of the grades of 2 progressions.
If a student fails to progress (and/or if he/she wishes to improve degree), he/she still has the right to be
examined in the theory in the final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1. Modern Food Microbiology, Jay J.M., Loessner M.J., Golden D.A., Springer. 2. Fundamental Food Microbiology, Ray B., Bhunia A., CRC Press. 3. Food Microbiology, Adams M.R., Moss M.O., Royal Society of Chemistry. 4. Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle M.P., Beuchat L.R., ASM Press. ‐ Related academic journals: 1. International Journal of Food Microbiology
(https://www.journals.elsevier.com/international‐journal‐of‐food‐microbiology)
2. Food Microbiology (https://www.journals.elsevier.com/food‐microbiology/most‐
downloaded‐articles)
3. Journal of Food Protection (http://jfoodprotection.org/)
4. Frontiers in Microbiology, Section Food Microbiology
(https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/microbiology/sections/food‐microbiology)
5. Foodborne Pathogens and Disease (http://www.liebertpub.com/fpd)
6. Journal of Food Safety (http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1111/(ISSN)1745‐
4565)
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2500 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY I
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: CELL BIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐
undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐
15/69‐syllabus‐fysiologiai
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to present the basic principles governing the mechanisms of human body function at a cellular, tissue, organ and organ systems level. Students will acquire a fully integrated and functional perception and not just mnemonic, fragmented knowledge of the human body functions. An integrated comprehension of the physiological mechanisms of the human body function is considered as a prerequisite for the students in order to understand the role of foods and nutrition in human health. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and
Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Working independently
Team work
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
‐ Introduction to Human Physiology: Basic concepts and definitions on human physiology, chemical composition and levels of organization of human body, presentation of organ systems, homeostasis, homeostatic control systems, fluid compartments. ‐ Cellular Physiology: Cell structures (cell membranes and cell organelles), basic cell functions (movement of molecules across cell membranes, protein functions, cell proliferation and metabolism, gene information and protein synthesis, control of cells by chemical messenger, intercellular communication). ‐ Nervous System Physiology: Structure and function of neurons, membrane potentials, ionic base on the formation and propagation of neuronal signals, electrical and chemical synapses, neurotransmitters, structure and function of the central nervous system and the peripheral nervous system, somatic and autonomic nervous system, sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system. ‐ Endocrine System Physiology: Classification of hormones and endocrine glands, mechanisms of hormone action, the hypothalamus and the pituitary gland, thyroid gland, parathyroids, thymus, adrenal glands, pancreas, kidney, gonads. ‐ Muscular System Physiology: Skeletal and smooth muscles, structure of muscle fiber, mechanisms of muscle contraction, the role of myosin, actin, troponin, tropomyosin and calcium ions in muscle contraction, membrane excitation and neuromuscular junctions. ‐ Skeletal System Physiology: Skeletal system structure and function, bone tissue, bone formation, bone absorption, bone metabolism, the role of calcium and phosphorus on bone metabolism, bone marrow, cartilages, joints, endocrine control of bone metabolism.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Multiple choice questionnaires, Short‐answer questions, public presentation.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Guyton AC (2009). Human Physiology. Translation and Editing of Greek Edition: Evangelou A. Medical Publications, Litsas. ISBN: 960‐372‐012‐7 2) Guyton AC & Hall JE (2008). Medical Physiology. Editing of Greek Edition: Anogianakis G, Evangelou ΑΜ. Scientific Publications, Parisianou. ISBN: 978‐960‐394‐513‐0. 3) Mulroney SE, Myers AK. Basic Principles in Human Physiology (2010). Editing of Greek Edition: Anogianakis G, Papadimitriou E, Chaniotis D. Medical Publications, Paschalidis PC. ISBN: 978‐960‐489‐069‐9. 4) Gimpa‐Tziampiri O (2000). Human Physiology. Zygos Publications. ISBN: 960‐8065‐00‐3
FOOD CHEMISTRY I
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1850 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE FOOD CHEMISTRY I
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the
course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 7 LABORATORIES 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=154
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
With the successful completion of the course of Food Chemistry I:
Students acquire knowledge on the structure, nomenclature, classification, physical,chemical and organoleptic properties of molecules that are the main ingredients of foods such as water, carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
Students understand the reactions of the main ingredients of food and how theycan affect food quality.
Students have the skills to predict interactions of the main ingredients of food andtheir impact on food quality
Students get acquainted with the methods for determining moisture, total solids,total carbohydrates, total proteins and total lipids in foods.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Retrieve, analyse and synthesise data and information, with the use of necessary technologies Work autonomously Work in teams Design and management of experiments Be critical and self‐critical Advance free, creative and causative thinking work in a multidisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS
THEORY
The effect of water on food. Structure, nomenclature, and properties of monosaccharide and their reactions occurring in food.
Structure, nomenclature, and properties of oligosaccharides and their reactions occurring in food.
Polysaccharide structure, properties and uses in food. Structure, nomenclature, and properties of amino acid and their reactions occurring in food.
Structure, nomenclature, and properties of peptides in food. Structure, nomenclature, and properties of proteins and their reactions occurring in food.
Structure, nomenclature, and properties of fatty acids in food.
Structure, nomenclature and properties of acylglycerol that occur in foods and reactions involved.
Structure, nomenclature and properties of polar lipids occurring in foods and reactions involved.
Peroxidation of lipid components in food and ways of prevention Structure, nomenclature and properties of unsaponifiable ingredients. LABORATORY
Methods for determining moisture in food.
Determination of moisture and total solids in various foods.
Methods for determining carbohydrates in food. Determination of total sugars in food. Methods for the determination of amino acids, peptides and proteins in foodstuffs.
Determination of total protein in food. Methods for determining lipids in foods Determination of lipids in food.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Multimedia presentations and presentation software usage Email communication with students Support of Learning Process via the electronic moodle platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
Laboratory reports 20
Autonomous study 112
Course total (30h/ECTS)
210 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Students are evaluated in Greek Language through a final written examination with short‐answer and/or open‐ended and/or multiple‐choice questions on the theory of the course. The grade of this final examination counts for 60% of the final grade of the course Students are evaluated by written laboratory reports on the understanding of the principle of the methodology they used, the presentation and processing of the experimental data and the evaluation of the result. The average of the grades of laboratory reports counts for 20% of the final grade of the course. Students are also evaluated on the lab through a final written test with short‐answer and/or problem solving and/or multiple‐choice questions. The grade of this final examination counts for 20% of the final grade of the course
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Food Chemistry, Belitz Hans – Dieter, Grosch Werner, Schieberle Peter, Tziola Pub.,
4th Edition, 2011 (Translated in Greek)
Food Chemistry, Zabetakis, I., Proestos C., Markaki, P., Stamoulis Pub., 1st Edition,
2014 (In Greek)
Food Analysis, Andrikopoulos N., Andrikopoulos N., Pub., 2nd Edition, 2015
Food Processing, Vol 1, Lazos E., Faidimos Pub., 2014 (In Greek)
‐ Related academic journals:
Food Chemistry
Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry
Progress in food chemistry
Journal of Food Chemistry and Nanotechnology
Journal of Experimental Food Chemistry
Journal of food chemistry and Nutrition
HISTORY AND ANTHROPOLOGY OF NUTRITION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2000 SEMESTER 3rd
COURSE TITLE HISTORY AND ANTHROPOLOGY OF NUTRITION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ΝΟ
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/362‐history‐
nutrition
https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/FNS134/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course the students can:
• Have proven knowledge and understanding of human nutrition issues with emphasis on history and anthropology of nutrition, backed up by advancedscience textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments atthe cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition.
• They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate to practicing the profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientistand have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and
nutrition advice.
• They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both qualified and non‐specialized people about human nutrition.
• They have developed those general knowledge acquisition skills that they need to continue in further studies with a high degree of autonomy, by studying the specific aspects of nutrition science.
Knowledge and skills
At the end of the course the student may:
• Has advanced knowledge on nutrition science issues, which implies a critical understanding of theories and principles with emphasis on history and anthropology.
• Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of human nutrition.
• Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutrition advice.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aims at:
Connecting ancient nutrition with modern nutrition attitudes
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutrition science, with the use of the necessary technology
Adapting to new situations about nutrition science
Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues
Working independently
Team work about nutrition
Working in an international environment
Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management
Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Respect for the natural environment
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. Food selection: biological and cultural factors shaping food likes and disgusts. Theoretical approaches to the interpretation of food selection. 2. Human nutrition in the context human evolution. Major milestones in the history of human nutrition: use of fire, agriculture, livestock, industry and technology, scientific progress. The role of nutrition in the evolution of mankind. 3. Dietary practices and habits around the world: the role of religion in shaping dietary rules. 4. Odd dietary practices and possible interpretations as ecological and cultural issues. 5. History of foods and their role in human nutrition up to date. 6. Nutrition crises: famine, immigration in an environment with different diet culture, nutrition transition in developing societies, genetically modified foods. 7. Modern nutrition policies and their impact on shaping food choices. The role of industry. 8. Anthropological approach to the prevalence of non‐communicable diseases in modern societies, with special reference to obesity epidemic.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer,e‐ mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Essays 10
Autonomous study 71
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Assessment of the course is done through a written examination and through a teamwork assessment. The aim of the work is to choose from a relevant list of topics and the development of a cutting‐edge nutrition and health topic and its presentation in the course. The participation of the written exam in the final score is 70% and the assessment of the work 30%. Both grades (written examination and work evaluation) should be greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0).
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
ulture, People, Nature: an introduction to general anthropology, Harris, M., Allyn & Bacon, 7th edition, 1997, (ISBN‐10: 0673990931). Food Politics, Nestle, M., University of California Press, 2nd Edition, 2007, (ISBN‐10: 0520254031). The sociology of food: eating, diet and culture, Mennel, S.J., Murcott, A., van Otterllo, A.H., SAGE publications, 2nd Edition, 1993, (ISBN‐10: 0803988389). ‐ Related academic journals: European Journal of Nutrition Journal of Nutrition International Journal of Nutrition
BIOCHEMISTRY II
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2100 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE BIOCHEMISTRY II
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐
undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐
15/72‐syllabus‐bioximeiaii
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to present the basic principles of human metabolism. Students are expected to acquire the basic principles of catabolism and anabolism for the fourth classes of nutrients‐biomacromolecules; e.g. carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids. Special emphasis is laid on the comprehension of the relatedness, differences and coordination of the main metabolic pathways, highlighting on the metabolic regulation and control analysis, as well as the bioenergetics governing catabolic and anabolic pathways. Students are expected to utilize any knowledge already acquired in previous semesters in order to achieve full understanding of the metabolic pathways through which human body utilizes
nutrients in aim to accomplish its basic physiological functions. The knowledge gained during this course is essential in order for the understanding of the role of nutrients on the human metabolism to be achieved. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Working independently
Team work
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory ‐Introduction to Metabolism: Basic Principles on Human Metabolism, Anabolism and Catabolism, Bioenergetics, Phosphoryl Groups Transfer and ATP, NADH, NADPH and FADH2 as Electron Carriers, Basic Categories of Biochemical Reactions Governing Human Metabolism, Basic Metabolic Stages, Metabolic Regulation ‐Carbohydrate Metabolism: Glycolysis, Gluconeogenesis, Citric Acid Cycle, Oxidative Phosphorylation, Glycogen Metabolism, Pentose Phosphate Pathway ‐Lipid Metabolism: De novo Biosynthesis and β‐Oxidation of Fatty Acids, Biosynthesis and Degradation of Triacyloglycerols ‐ Protein Metabolism: Proteolysis, Transamination and Deamination, Amino Acids Biosynthesis and Degradation, Urea Cycle ‐Nucleotide Metabolism: De novo Biosynthesis and Degradation of Purines and Pyrimidines ‐Topology of Metabolic Pathways, Metabolic Control and Regulation Check Points, Coordination Points and Relatedness of Metabolic Pathways Laboratory ‐Detection and quantification reactions for carbohydrates: detection of total sugars (Molisch reaction), detection of reduced sugars (Benedict reaction) ‐Carbohydrate metabolism: acidic and enzymatic hydrolysis of starch ‐Protein unfolding and denaturation: pH and temperature effect ‐Isolation and determination of bovine myoglobin ‐Enzyme kinetics: construction of standard curve for p‐nitrophenol, study of the enzymatic function of acidic phosphatase, study of the kinetic behavior of the acidic phosphatase as a function of time
‐ DNA extraction from plant and animal tissues
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 95
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Open‐ended questions, laboratory exercises, public presentation.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Α. Lehninger, D. Nelson, M.M. Cox, D.L. Nelson (2007) “Lehninger ‘s Principles of Biochemistry” 4th Edition, W.H. Freeman. ISBN: 9780716743392 . 2) J. Koolman, K.H. Roehm (2005) “Color Atlas of Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Thieme. ISBN: 1588902471. 3) J.M. Berg, J.L. Tymoczko, L. Stryer (2002): “Biochemistry” 5th Edition, W.H. Freeman. ISBN: 0716730510. 4) Murray RK, Botham KM, Rodwell VW, Bender DA, Kennelly PJ, Weil PA (2011). Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry. Editing of Greek Edition: A.G. Papavasileiou. Medical Publication P.C. Paschalidis. ISBN: 9780071625913. 5) Zubay, W.W. Parson, D.E. Vance (1999), “Principles of Biochemistry Ι‐ΙΙΙ”. Editing of Greek Edition: C.E. Sekeris, A.T. Kalafoutis, Medical Publication P.C. Paschalidis. ISBN: 9607398645.
NUTRITION EDUCATION GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIROMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2550 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE NUTRITION EDUCATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ΝΟ
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/361‐
community‐nutrition
https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/fns135/
(1) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of human nutrition issues, backed upby advanced science textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition into community. • They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate topracticing the profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientist and have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and nutrition advice. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both
qualified and non‐specialized people about human nutrition education. • They have developed those general knowledge acquisition skills that they need to continue in further studies with a high degree of autonomy, by studying the specific aspects of nutrition science. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on nutrition education issues, which implies a critical understanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of human nutrition into the community. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutrition advice.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aims at:
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutrition education with the use of the necessary technology
Adapting to new situations about nutrition education
Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues
Working independently
Team work about nutrition
Working in an international environment
Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management
Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Respect for the natural environment
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(2) SYLLABUS
Course Syllabus: Nutritional assessment at personal and community level and assessment of dietary intake. Research methodology in nutritional epidemiology. Nutrition and public health: assessment, intervention design and evaluation of their effectiveness. Public health nutrition programs throughout the world. Behaviour
change theories: applications in nutrition science. Epidemiology of major nutrition related diseases and relative prevention programs. Laboratory Syllabus: Nutritional assessment and support tools and methodologies. Assessment of dietary intake in the community, assessment of body composition and physical activity levels. Design of intervention programs for nutritional support.
(3) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer, e‐mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures Course 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Tutorials 10
Autonomous Study 105
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to
Assessment of the course is done through a final examination in theory and laboratory and through assessment of the presence of the student during the laboratory exercises (laboratory reports‐exercises 30% of lab score). The participation of the written examination in the final score is 70% and the laboratory performance is 30%. Both grades (written examination and laboratory grade) should greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0).
students.
(4) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: Community Nutrition in Action. An Enterpreneurial Approach, M.A. Boyle, D.H. Holben, Brooks Cole, 2009, (ISBN‐10: 0495559016). ‐ Related academic journals: European Journal of Nutrition Journal of Nutrition International Journal of Nutrition
FOOD BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 1900 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE FOOD BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: INTRODUCTION TO FOOD INDUSTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://aegeamoodle.aegean.gr
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The main purpose for the existence of the food companies (as autonomous economic units) is the effective satisfaction of the modern human needs. Such effective satisfaction of human needs can’t be materialized without the effective organization and the management of the referred companies: The objective of this course is to introduce to the students the basics, and the main rules which are directing the external and the internal environment in which the companies are operating daily. The food companies constitute a specific sector, subdivision of the overall business environment and therefore are directed by the same rules, and regulations which are opposed to all companies regardless sector of activity. The students are acquainted first with the internal structures of the companies and the good management practices required for better operation and growth, and second with the effects the environment is introducing to the companies’ operation. Furthermore the students are introduced to the terms of effective management with emphasis to the programming, organization, direction, auditing, and decision processing.
Without covering each one of the above subjects related to business management in depth, the students in the current course are assisted to gain an overall, and comprehensive view at the introductory level, and to understand terminology and subjects which they will need later on in the following years of education, and the rest of their professional career, especially since there is good chance they will be occupied in the Greek food business sector (25% of the Greek overall business sector). General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision making Working in an international environment Project planning management Criticism and self‐criticism
(3) SYLLABUS
1. The external and internal environment of the company 2. Definitions to the meaning of the company 3. Distinctions of the different economic units 4. Definition of the management and the company’s managerial staff 5. Historic evolution of the science and practical application of management 6. Main areas of application of the business management 7. Business planning of companies 8. The function of the organization within the company 9. The function of the operation within the company 10. The function of business auditing 11. The effective decision making process within the framework of the company
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple
The evaluation and the grading of the students takes place via written exams at the end of the semester. A minimum of 5 out of 10 maximum grading is required in order to be considered a passing status for the level of grade
choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Introduction to the business management, Authors: D. C. Bourandas, N..Α. Papalexandri, Edition Ε. Benou, Year 2003: (ISBN: 960‐359‐007‐Χ).
1. Reengineering Management, Champy S., Harper Business, 1996 2. The boundaryless organization, Ashkenas R., Urich D., Jick J., Kerr S., Jossey Bass,
2000. 3. Food & Beverage Management, ernard D., Lockwood A., Pantelidis I., Elsevier
Science & Technology, 2008 (0750667303). 4. Strategy & Management of Industrial Brands, Maraval, P., Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2003 (ISBN: 140207753X). 5. Crisis management in the food and drinks industry, Doeg C., Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2005, (0387233822). 6. Effective small business management, Scarborough N., Zimmerer W., Wilson D.,
Person Education, 2008 (0132079518) 7. Successful Innovations: how to encourage and to implement profitable ideas,
Syrett M., Lammiman I., Greek version, Edition Kerkira, 2004. 8. Strategic Leadership, Finkelstein S., Hambrick D., West Publishing, 1996 9. The strategy – focused organization: How balanced scorecard companies thrive in
the new business environment, Kaplan R., Norton D., HBSP, 2002 10. Becoming a Master Manager, Quinn R., et.al., Willey, 1996. 11. Organizational Theory and design, Daft R., West Publishing, 2002 12. Introduction to the management: A practical guidance of development , Williams
K., Johson B., Greek version Edition Kritiki, 2005. 13. Leadership, Bourandas D., Edition Kritiki, 2005. 14. Management, Robins S., Coultar M., Prentice Hall, 1996 15. Management: Concepts, Practices and Skillls, JMondy W., Premeaux S., Prentice
Hall , 1995.
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY II GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2600 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY II
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
GENERAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: CELL BIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐
undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐
15/75‐syllabus‐fysiologiaii
(1) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to present the basic principles governing the mechanisms of human body function at a cellular, tissue, organ and organ systems level. Students will acquire a fully integrated and functional perception and not just mnemonic, fragmented knowledge of the human body functions. An integrated comprehension of the physiological mechanisms of the human body functions is considered as a prerequisite for the students in order to understand the role of foods and nutrition in human health. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use ofthe necessary technology
Working independently
Team work
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(2) SYLLABUS
‐ Gastrointestinal System Physiology: Organization and function of gastrointestinal system, gastrointestinal tract: mouth, pharynx, esophagus, stomach, small and large intestine, accessory organs: salivary glands, liver, pancreas, gallbladder, structure of gastrointestinal tract wall, gastrointestinal secretions, digestion and absorption of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, vitamins, water and minerals, neuronal and hormonal regulation of gastrointestinal processes. ‐ Cardiovascular System Physiology: Basic principles on blood physiology: plasma components, erythrocytes, leukocytes, platelets, blood cell production, hemostasis, basic principles on heart and vessel physiology: structure and function of heart and peripheral vessels, microcirculation, structure of capillary wall and diffusion mechanisms. ‐ Respiratory System Physiology: Organization and function of respiratory system: airways, lungs, bronchi and alveoli, respiratory cycle (inspiration and expiration), ventilation and lung mechanics, exchange of gases in alveoli and tissues, transport of oxygen, carbon dioxide and hydrogen ions in blood, control analysis of respiration. ‐ Urinary System Physiology: Structure of kidney and urinary system, basic renal processes: glomerular filtration, tubular reabsorption, tubular secretion, metabolism by renal tubules, regulation of sodium, water, potassium, calcium and phosphates balance, hydrogen ion regulation, bicarbonate handling. ‐ Lymphatic and Immune System Physiology: Structure and function of lymphatic system: lymph, lymphatic vessels, lymphatic tissue, primary and secondary lymphoid organs, structure and function of immune system: basic principles on immunology, immune system cells‐leukocytes (polymorphonuclear granulocytes, monocytes, lymphocytes), inflammation and inflammatory mediators, lymphocyte origin and function, specific and non‐specific immune defence mechanisms, cell mediating and humoral immunity.
(3) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 111
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Multiple choice questionnaires, Short‐answer questions, public presentation.
(4) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Vander A, Sherman J, Luciano D (2001). Human Physiology: The Mechanisms ofBody Function Ι & ΙΙ. Editing of Greek Edition: Geladas Ν, Tsakopoulos Μ. Medical Publications, Paschalidis PC. ISBN: 978‐0‐12‐374286‐5. 2) Guyton AC & Hall JE (2008). Medical Physiology. Editing of Greek Edition:Anogianakis G, Evangelou ΑΜ. Scientific Publications, Parisianou. ISBN: 978‐960‐394‐513‐0. 3) Mulroney SE, Myers AK. Basic Principles in Human Physiology (2010). Editing ofGreek Edition: Anogianakis G, Papadimitriou E, Chaniotis D. Medical Publications, Paschalidis PC. ISBN: 978‐960‐489‐069‐9. 4) Gimpa‐Tziampiri O (2000). Human Physiology. Zygos Publications. ISBN: 960‐8065‐00‐3.
FOOD CHEMISTRY II
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES COURSE CODE 2200 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE FOOD CHEMISTRY II
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total
credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 7
LABORATORY 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=406
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
With the successful completion of the course of Food Chemistry II: • Students acquire knowledge on the classification and structure of micro‐constituents such as vitamins, minerals and phenolic ingredients, as well as the categories of food additives • Students acquire knowledge also on the individual basic foodstuffs of animal andplant origin and beverages, their composition, as well as the molecules that characterize each of them. • Students understand the ways in which food micronutrients change during theproduction, processing and maintenance of food and the effect of food additives on their quality
• Students get acquainted with vitamin C and total phenolics determination, totallipid isolation techniques, lipid separation techniques in classes, and chromatographic techniques for lipid separation into species.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Retrieve, analyse and synthesise data and information, with the use of necessary technologies Work autonomously Work in teams Design and management of experiments Be critical and self‐critical Advance free, creative and causative thinking work in a multidisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS THEORY
• FOOD MICROSCYSTATICS‐ Vitamins ‐ Inorganic ingredients ‐ Phenolic ingredients ‐ Food additives • SPECIAL BASIC FOODS OF ANIMAL AND PLANT ORIGIN‐ Milk ‐ Egg ‐Meat ‐ Fish ‐ Edible fats and oils. ‐ Cereals ‐ Pulses ‐Fruit and vegetables ‐ Herbs and pcicies
LABORATORIES
• Determination of vitamin C in fruit juice• Isolation and preservation of total phenolics in red wine• Isolation of total fat from egg yolk.• Separation of egg yolk total lipid into individual classes of polar and neutral lipids• Separation of polar and neutral egg yolk lipids into species by thin layerchromatography (TLC).
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
FACE TO FACE
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Multimedia presentations and presentation software usage Email communication with students Support of Learning Process via the electronic moodle platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
Laboratory reports 20
Autonomous study 112
Course total (30h/ECTS)
210 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Students are evaluated in Greek language through a final written examination with short‐answer and/or multiple‐choice questions on the theory of the course. The degree of this final examination count for 50% of the final grade of the course
Students are evaluated by written laboratory reports on the understanding of the principle of the methodology they use, the presentation and processing of the experimental data and the evaluation of the result. The average of the grades
of laboratory reports counts for 25% of the final grade of the course. Students are also evaluated on the laboratory through a final written examination with open‐ended and/or problem solving and/or multiple‐choice questions. The grade of this final examination counts for 25% of the final grade of the course
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Food Chemistry, Belitz Hans – Dieter, Grosch Werner, Schieberle Peter, Tziola Pub.,
4th Edition, 2011 (Translated in Greek)
Olive oil, Kyritsakis A., Kyritsakis A. Pub., 4th Edition, 2007 (In Greek)
Food Processing, Volume 2, Lazos, E.S., Antonakopoulou H. Pub., , 1st Edition, 2014
(In Greek)
Introduction in Food Science and Technology, Sflomos K. Varzakas T., Sflomos K.
Pub., , 1st Edition, 2015 (In Greek)
‐ Related academic journals:
Food Chemistry
Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry
Progress in food chemistry
Journal of Food Chemistry and Nanotechnology
Journal of Experimental Food Chemistry
Journal of food chemistry and Nutrition
PRACTICAL TRAINING GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2400 SEMESTER 4th
COURSE TITLE PRACTICAL TRAINING
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
WORK AT HOST CARRIER 140 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: BASIC MICROBIOLOGY / ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://aegeamoodle.aegean.gr / www.fns.aegean.gr
(1) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Food businesses are 26% of Greek industry, and contribute 23% of national GDP. That means that a sufficient number of companies exist for effective integration of department’s graduates into the labour market. In this context, the design and implementation of an institutional practical training placement is a key part of the curriculum of the Department This is a pioneering and innovative practical training course, which seeks the following objectives: • To create suitable conditions for communication and knowledge of the students with thecounterparts companies, to facilitate their professional orientation, and to support the finding a job after graduation. • To familiarize students with the widest possible range of food businesses and with thebasic principles of organization, operation and development. • To enrich the students with experience in practical application of modern developments infood and nutrition, and adaptation of manufacturing processes and certification of these products as they are implemented on an industrial scale.
The institution's practical training purpose is to familiarize the students with the market reality, and its existing conditions food entrepreneurship and selected public organizations at the national level. The institution of practice aims to bring the student into direct contact with business and labour reality and to combine, as far as possible, the theoretical training with experiential training and familiarization with the production process.General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Production of new research ideas Project planning and management Criticism and self criticism
(2) SYLLABUS
Those students interested in participating in the course, complete relevant application form and submit to the Secretariat of the practical training program before the closing date for applications, which is determined by the announcement of the program’s Secretariat. The choice of the specific placement position for each student is made by the scientific director of the practical training program, based on academic performance, student preferences, and previous experience. Particular care and attention is given in finding a business or organization in the district area of permanent residence of each student so that future direct link to the "local" labor market can be matched, and ensure a harmonious work during practice at the proximal family environment. The practical training program is prepared with the support of the Office of Employment & Career (DASTA) of the university, operating within the department. The practical training for all academic years so far is funded, by the means of minimum monthly salaries for the students, by the a specific funding program of The University of the Aegean (sponsored by the E.C. through the Greek ministry of Education). It is estimated that more than 90% of the sophomores participate in the course each year, a number which indicates the student’s interest for the food business reality. In addition, every year as part of the practical training program group of students voluntarily participate in the pilot production of innovative new foods, in collaboration with Greek food companies. With this food they participate at the European students’ competition named “Ecotrophelia”, which is implemented in Greece by the Association of the Greek Food Industry (SEVT). Every year at least three such groups of students are formed, producing three new products, and every year one of those products is awarded one of the awards offered by the competition (for the last 7 years now!!))
(3) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Two months face to face employment in the
organization or company
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Work at host carrier 140
Writing of activities report
10
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
150
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The performance is based on: 1. Assessing student performance recorded by thesupervisor of the enterprise 2. The student's report on the activities3. The assessment of the student's performancerecorded by the supervising professor
(4) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Web site links of the organizations representing the Greek Food industry, associations, and the bodies offering related services (all of them in Greek)
FOOD BIOCHEMISTRY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2250 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE FOOD BIOCHEMISTRY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is the understanding of biochemical reactions and processes occurring in food systems. Particular emphasis is given on the comprehension of enzyme‐catalyzed reactions and how they can affect the sensory characters, safety and nutritional value of foods. Laboratory course aim at familiarizing students with basic concepts of enzymic reactions and train them on basic calculations pertaining to enzyme kinetics.
Following successful attendance of the course, the students will be in position to:
Understand basic biochemical reactions in foods
Comprehend the impact of those reactions on food quality
Understand the application of biochemical technologies to food production
and preservation
Understand methodologies for improvement and development of foods
Suggest preservation methods
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
(3) SYLLABUS
LECTURE COURSE Part I: Enzymology 1. Enzymes – General aspects. 2. Enzyme kinetics. 3. Inhibition of enzyme activity Part II: The role of enzymes in foods 1. Enzymic oxidation of lipids. 2. Enzymic browning. 3. Meat biochemistry Part III: Enzymic technology 1. Lipases. 2. Amylases and glycosidases.
3. Pectinolytic enzymes Part IV: Applied biotechnology and industrial fermentations. 1. Bioreactors. 2. Fermentation technology 3. Fermented foods LABORATORY COURSE 1. Enzyme kinetics – Experimental design and units. 2. Determination of enzyme concentration. 3. Determination of the kinetic parameters Km, Vmax, kcat. 4. Enzyme inhibition 5. Enzyme immobilization ‐ Stability
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face. In laboratory courses, following a
short presentation of methodology, students
perform exercises using appropriate
instruments/devices. Furthermore, students
practice scientific writing by composing assays, in
which they present and analyse experimental
results.
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Lectures are supported by overhead projections and other audio material.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous study 95
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical
The language of evaluation is Greek. Overall course grade comprises of lecture grade (50%) and laboratory grade (50%). Lecture course exams include multiple choice questions. Laboratory course exams include problem solving (50%) and assays (50%).
examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Klonis I., 2010. Enzyme Biotechnology. Crete University Press.
NUTRITION THROUGH THE LIFE CYCLE
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIROMENT ACADEMIC UNIT FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2650 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE NUTRITION THROUGH THE LIFE CYCLE
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: INTRODUCTION TO NUTRITION
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/367‐nutrition‐
cycle
https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/FNS129/
https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/FNS130/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of human nutrition issues, backed upby advanced science textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition though life cycle.• They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate to
practicing the profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientist and have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and nutrition advice in each life stage. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both qualified and non‐specialized people about human nutrition in each stage. • They have developed those general knowledge acquisition skills that they need to continue in further studies with a high degree of autonomy, by studying the specific aspects of nutrition science. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on nutrition life cycle issues, which implies a critical understanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of human nutrition into the community. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutrition advice.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aims at: Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutrition in each life stage with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations about nutrition in each stage Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues Working independently Team work about nutrition Working in an international environment Production of new research ideas Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Course Syllabus: Object of this course is the specific dietary requirements, the
factors affecting these requirements and the diet behavior in the various life stages. In this context, the course covers the requirements of: 1. The pre‐conception period, pregnancy and breastfeeding 2. Infancy, childhood and adolescence 3. Special situations in young and middle‐aged adults 4. The elderly The presentation of each section in the light of the specific in each stage physiologic characteristics of each age group, as well as the social and psychological factors that can influence dietary intake and food selection. Laboratory Syllabus: Dietary requirements assessment at the various stages of the life cycle through case studies. Evaluation of the nutrient value of foods aimed at specific age groups
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer, e‐mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous study 95
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Assessment of the theory of the course is done through a final examination and through a teamwork assessment. The aim of the work is to present the specific dietary requirements of a specific age group and present it within the course. The participation of the written exam in the final score is 70% and the assessment of the work 30%. Both grades (written examination and work evaluation) should be greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0). The evaluation of the course is done by 70% assessment of the theory and 30% by laboratory (written laboratory examination and laboratory reports, 30% of lab score). Both grades (theory and lab) should be greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0).
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
.Nutrition through the Life Cycle, J.E. Brown, Thomson Wadsworth Publishing, 2008, (ISBN‐10: 0495116378). Nutrition throughout the Life Cycle, B.S. Worthington‐Roberts, S. Rodwell‐Williams. McGraw‐Hill CompanyBrown, 1996, (ISBN: 0815194277). ‐ Related academic journals: European Journal of Nutrition Journal of Nutrition International Journal of Nutrition
FOOD ENGINEERING – PHYSICAL PROCESSES
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2700 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE FOOD ENGINEERING – PHYSICAL PROCESSES
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: MATHEMATICS OR PHYSICS
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
This course is the initial introductory lesson in the processes taking place in the food industry. The subject matter of the course aims to familiarize students with the basic concepts of engineering in the food industry in order to succeed in producing high quality foods at the lowest possible cost. After the lesson, students will be able to apply the principles of fluid engineering in order to estimate the total loss of pipelines, to choose the appropriate mechanical transport system (pumps etc.), to use flow measurement instruments, with emphasis on liquid fluids, to apply the basic principles of transmission of heat and mass in permanent and non‐permanent state so as to solve problems of food processes, to implement the basic principles of evaporation and dehydration in food processes and preservation, to carry out experimental measurements and calculate
the basic characteristics of the above processes, to understand and determine the parameters that affect the proper functioning of the mechanical equipment.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Production of free, creative and inductive thinking Project planning
(3) SYLLABUS
The acquisition of knowledge about subjects related to the physical food processes and the basic technologies during the design of food industries. Also, the students will get familiar with these issues through tutorial topics so as to achieve the production of high quality foods with the lowest cost. The subject matter of the lesson includes the following: Basic mathematical and mechanical principles, thermophysical properties of foods, specific heat, thermal conductivity, thermal diffusivity, types of heat, vapor properties, mass and energy balances, reology, types of fluids, viscocity, types of viscometers, frictional energy losses, pump selection, fluid agitation‐mixing, selection of agitators, modes of heat transfer, conductive heat transfer, convective heat transfer, radiation heat transfer, dielectric‐ohmic heating, problems under steady‐state heat transfer and unsteady‐state heat transfer, types of heat exchangers, evaporation, types of evaporators, overall heat transfer coefficients for evaporators, mass and energy balances for single‐effect and multiple‐effect evaporators, dehydration, water activity, water sorption isotherm curves, dehydration rates, hygrascopic and non‐hygrascopic materials, types of dryers, mass transfer, Fick’s law, molecular diffusion to liquids, solids. The following laboratory exercises are performed in the laboratory: Study of physical characteristics of foods, measurement of moisture loss of various foods, rheological characterization of fluid foods, uptake of pigments on activated charcoal derived from agricultural residues
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous study 95
Course Total (30/ECTS)
180 hours
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
50% Theory and laboratory examination (1h) + 50% Final tutorial exercises (2h)
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: ‐ H. N. Lazarides, Food Engineering, 2nd Edition, Giahoudis Publications, Thessaloniki, 2007. ‐R. P. Singh, D. R. Heldman, Introduction to Food Engineering, Academic Press, 2003 ‐ K. J. Valentas, E. Rotstein, R. P. Singh, Handbook of Food Engineering Practice, CRC Press, 1997 ‐ P.G.Smith, Introduction to Food Process Engineering, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, 2003 ‐ W. L. McCabe, J. C. Smith, P. Harriot, Basic Physical Mechanical Processes (Translation S. Polimati‐dou) 6η Edition, Tziolas Publications, 2001
‐ Related academic journals: ‐Journal of Food Engineering (Elsevier) ‐Journal of Food Process Engineering (Wiley) ‐Food Engineering Reviews (Springer) ‐International Journal of Food Engineering and Technology (Science PG)
¢9/Ibh[hD¸ hC Chh5{ hC !bLa![ hwLDLb
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3400 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE TECHNOLOGY OF FOODS OF ANIMAL ORIGIN
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORIES 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I OR FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php
?id=151
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The students will: 1. acquire the basic knowledge in technology of animal origin foods
2. have the ability to implement the acquired knowledge into animal origin foodsproduction field
3. have the ability to inform both specialized and non‐specialized audience abouttechnology of animal origin foods
3. have all the required knowledge and skills in order to continue their studies.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
4. This module aims so that the degree‐holder will acquire the followingcompetences:
5. critical thinking
6. decision ‐making
7. formulation and production of animal origin food products
8. 4. problem handling
(3) SYLLABUS
Lectures: a) nutritional value of meat b) quality of meat c) skeletal muscle tissue structure d) muscle contraction ‐ relaxation e) stages of rigor mortis‐Pale, Soft, Exudative (PSE) meat ‐ Dark, Firm and Dry (DFD) meat f) adipose tissue g) meat pigments h) water holding capacity of meat i) methods of meat cooling, freezing, cooling muscle contraction j) smoking k) salting l) food additives in meat products m) meat products.
Laboratory practise: Gas Chromatography‐ qualitive and quantitive analysis of fatty acids of animal origin foods as nutritional index.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer usage to conduct the lectures Supporting the learning process through asynchronous e learning (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
Essays 20
Autonomous study 82
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Evaluation of students is performed by multiple choice‐questions in Greek language through a
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
written final exam. Evaluation in laboratory exercises is performed by a) written laboratory report for each laboratory exercise and b) multiple choice‐questions in Greek language through a written final exam
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Handbook of Meat and Meat Processing, Second Edition, Y. H. Hui, CRC press, 2012.
2. Food processing technology:Principles and practice (Third edition), Peter J. Fellows, Woodhead Publishing and CRC Press, 2009
3. Fish Processing: Sustainability and New Opportunities, George M. Hall, Wiley‐Blackwell, 2010
4. Handbook of Poultry Science and Technology, Secondary Processing, Isabel Guerrero‐Legarreta, Y. H. Hui, Alma Delia Alarcón‐Rojo, Wiley, 2010.
‐ Related academic journals:
STRATEGIC MARKETING
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FODD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3000 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE STRATEGIC MARKETING
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://aegeamoodle.aegean.gr
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The world is experiencing a period of radical changes. The current economic crisis increases the percentage of poverty, and unemployment worldwide, which are tackled by supporting economic packages towards specific countries worldwide. The aim of these packages is to bring back the stability and the economic growth. In parallel, the rich countries of the west are suffering from decrease in the annual growth rate, while the economic power is steadily passing to the countries of the eastern hemisphere, which are reporting increased annual growth rate. These and other global changes demand a new radical consideration of the strategic marketing theories, which leads to the new updated marketing theory, the marketing 3.0. The objective of this course is the introduction to marketing 3.0, or otherwise to the era of values. In this new period where the experts of marketing do not deal with the human existence as simply the consumer – customer (marketing 2.0), but they approach it as a hole with mind, heart, and spirit. In this new period, the people do
not search the satisfaction to the products and the services which they choose only at the functional and emotional level, but at the human – spiritual level. In this new period, the companies move the center of their activities from the consumer to the human being, and balance their profit tactics towards the cooperative social responsibility. Companies are producing profit by developing values for their customers, and their shareholders. They accept their customers as a strategic start up level for growth understanding his human nature, and concentrating to his real needs, and worries! General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making Adapting to new structures Working in an international environment Criticism and self ‐criticism
(3) SYLLABUS
The course is separated in 4 units. In the first unit are summarized the more basic tendencies of enterprising world that describe the anthropocentric character of marketing and place the bases for Marketing 3.0. In the second unit it is explained how a company can transmit the objectives, the vision, and her values in each one from its basic partners, that the consumers, the workers, its collaborators of its network and its shareholders. In the Third unit are presented the opinions of the more basic aspects of application of Marketing 3.0 in the frames of effort of confrontation of big world challenges, as the prosperity, the poverty and the environmental viability, and it is described how the organizations can apply the anthropocentric model. And finally in the fourth unit the ten basic significances of Marketing 3.0 are desrcibed with selective examples of companies that have incorporated the basics of models in their activities. The units and their chapters are the following:
FIRST UNIT: 1. Acquaintance with the Marketing 3.0 2. The future Model of Marketing 3.0 SECOND UNIT: 3. Promotion of Corporate Vision in Consumers 4. Promotion of Corporate Values in Workers 5. Promotion of Corporate Values in Partners 6. Promotion of Corporate Vision in the Shareholdersr THIRD CHAPTER: 1. Promotion of the vision to the social and political changes 2. Promotion of new entrepreneurs in the new developing countries 3. Contribution of the companies to the environmental sustainability FOURTH CHAPTER:
Putting together the pieces of the puzzle
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
The professor’s notes are available to the students in power point presentation form through the Web‐CT Vista platform at the website:http://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr). The notes are divided to the chapters of the overall course.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
ACTIVITY SEMESTER WORKLOAD
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The evaluation and the grading of the students takes place via written exams at the end of the semester. A minimum of 5 out of 10 maximum grading is required in order to be considered a passing status for the level of grade
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Marketing 3.0: From products to customers to the human spirit, Philip Kotler, Hermawan Kartajaya, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey
1. Marketing without Marketing, Alex Wipperfurth, Brand Hijack, New York: Portfolio, 2005.
2. A Whole New Mind: Moving from the Information Age to the Conceptual Age, Daniel H. Pink, New York: Riverhead Books, 2005.
3. The New Age of Innovation: Driving Co‐created value through Global Networks, C.K. Prahalad, M.S. Krishnan, New York: McGraw‐Hill, 2008.
4. What Consumers Really Want, James H. Gilmore, B. Joseph Pine II, Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 2007
5. The Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid: Eradicating Poverty through Profits, C.K. Prahalad, Philadelfia: Wharton School Publishing, 2005
6. True to Our Roots: Fermenting a Business Revolution, Paul Dolan, Thom Elkjer,New York: Bloomberg Press, 2003
7. Introduction to Marketing G. Armstrong, P. Kottler, 9th Edition, 2009
Internet Sites:
www.un.org/millenniumgoals www.sric‐bi.com/VALS www.project10tothe100.com www.gsb.stanford.edu/exed/smm : Strategic Marketing management, STANFORD Graduate School of Business www.managementhelp.org/marketing : Free management Library
MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3250 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 3 Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: CELL BIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐15/83‐syllabus‐moriaki
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to understand the molecular mechanisms that govern cell function, whether prokaryotic or eukaryotic. Emphasis is placed on the storage of genetic information in DNA and the latest data on the structure of prokaryotic and eukaryotic chromosomes. The course analyzes classically topics of molecular biology, such as DNA replication, gene transcription and RNA translation into proteins. The basic elements of DNA technology and modern genomics are analyzed. Laboratory exercises relate to the analysis of protein and nucleotide sequences.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the
necessary technology
Decision‐making
Working independently
Team work
Production of new research ideas
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender
issues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory: Introduction to cell structure. The chemical composition of the cell ‐ The macromolecules and their properties. Basic elements of the structure of the prokaryotic and eukaryotic chromosomes. DNA replication in prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms. DNA recombination techniques. Mutations and DNA repair mechanisms. Transcription in prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms ‐ Regulation of gene expression. Translation into prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms. Recombinant DNA technology. Genomics ‐ Modern genomics and new ‐omics technologies.
Practical: Laboratory exercises assist learning and practice of basic Molecular Biology methods:
1. DNA extraction from animal and plant tissues using spin columns 2. Total RNA extraction from animal and plant tissues (Chomczynski method) 3. Reverse transcription (RT) of poly(A)‐RNA into cDNA. 4. in silico designing of primers used in polymerase chain reaction (PCR) 5. PCR using cDNA as reaction template (RT‐PCR) 6. Agarose gel electrophoresis
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography,
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Essays 20
Autonomous study 82
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek
Methods of evaluation: open‐ended questions
Written work (optional)
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
BOOK TITLE: Principles of Molecular Biology ISBN: 978‐618‐5135‐01‐0 AUTHOR: Burton E. Tropp PUBLISHER: Academic Publications J. Basdra & Co. YEAR OF PUBLISHING: 2015 LOCATION OF PUBLISHING: Alexandroupolis
GLOBAL AGRIFOOD SYSTEM AND FOOD CHAINS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3950 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE GLOBAL AGRIFOOD SYSTEM AND FOOD CHAINS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g.
lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIALISED GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
PREREQUISITE COURSES: BIODIVERSITY – BIOTIC RESOURCES
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
‐
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/452‐syllabus‐
pagk‐diatr
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Study of the multifunctional role of agroecosystems within the complex ecological and socio‐economic context formed during the 3rd Agricultural Revolution and thereafter. The study material is organized into three main axes (levels) concerning (a) food chains, (b) agricultural production systems, and (c) the agrifood system at local and global level. The learning objectives include:
Knowledge of (a) the basic characteristics of agroecosystems, through thesystematic analysis of their inputs/outputs; (b) the different methods of agro‐
ecosystem management, by studying the forms of conventional and sustainable agriculture; and (c) the multifunctional role of agroecosystems, with emphasis on their contribution to the agrifood system and nutrition.
Comprehension of the role of (a) the nutrient cycles in agricultural production; (b) the agricultural practices and the use of agrochemicals in the environment; and (c) the international economic, political and institutional framework in the agrifood system.
Understanding of the multidimensional function of agroecosystems and their critical role in the formation and management of rural areas, as well as, to the economic development in different bioclimatic zones (tropical, Mediterranean, deserted and cold areas).
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology.
Adapting to new situations.
Decision‐making.
Working in an international environment.
Working in an interdisciplinary environment.
Production of new research ideas.
Respect for difference and multiculturalism.
Respect for the natural environment.
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking.
(3) SYLLABUS
During the course are given weekly lectures that include: 1) Description of course structure. Introductory concepts and definitions.
Assignments, instructions and timetable for their completion. 2) The concept of agroecosystem. Classification, sources and ecological functions
of agroecosystems. Comparison with natural ecosystems. Food chains and bioaccumulation.
3) System analysis of inputs/outputs. Methods and tools of system analysis (introduction to Stella software). Analysis of the nutrients cycles (water, carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and sulfur).
4) The evolution of agricultural systems and the agricultural revolutions. The characteristics of the 3rd Agricultural Revolution (mechanization, fertilizing and
specialization) and its importance in economic development (complementary activity: projection of the 1st documentary).
5) The differentiation of agricultural production and the multifunctional role of agriculture. Creation and management of rural areas in the Mediterranean and deserted areas.
6) Creation and management of agricultural fields in tropical and cold areas (farming systems and agricultural production systems).
7) Ecosystem services of rural areas and their role in the quality of human life (well‐being). The agricultural sector in the European Union and Greece and the contribution of the agricultural policy and agro‐environmental measures of the CAP in the management of rural areas.
8) Integrated management of agricultural systems. Analysis of the socio‐economic and ecological context of rural areas.
9) Environmental impact from the application of conventional farming practices and the use of agrochemicals.
10) Forms of sustainable agriculture (organic and biodynamic agriculture, integrated management and natural cultivation) (complementary activity: projection of 2nd documentary).
11) Global agrifood system (multinational companies, World Trade Organization, alternative trends and movements).
12) Global food crisis and modern trends in management of agroecosystems to address it (genetically modified foods, functional foods and ecological farming management).
13) Presentation of papers and submission of a report in the form of a scientific article.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Yes, using a projector, internet access and viewing of audiovisual material (documentaries)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 24
Autonomous study 31
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
‐ Final written examination (80% of the final grade), in Greek, with questions of:
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(a) Short‐answer and (b) Multiple choices. ‐ Written Assignment (20% of the final grade).
Detailed instructions for the teaching material and evaluation process are provided on the web‐platform https://eclass.aegean.gr
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Polyrakis G.T. (2003) Environmental Agriculture. Psichalou Publications,Athens, ISBN: 9608336112, 464 pages (Eudoxus ID: 12593, in Greek)
2. Nikolaidis E. (2010) Agriculture, Environment, Nutrition: Greek Agriculture inGlobal Agrifood System. Papazisis Publications, Athens, ISBN: 9789600224238,243 pages (Eudoxus ID: 29492, in Greek)
3. Mazoyer M., Roudart L. (2005) A History of World Agriculture. ExandasPublications, Athens, ISBN: 9602566248, 610 pages (Eudoxus ID: 5724, inGreek)
4. Millennium Ecosystem Assessment (2005) Ecosystems and human well‐being:synthesis. Island Press, Washingtion. DC, ISBN: 1597260401, 155 p.
5. Collins W.W., Qualset C.O. (1998) Biodiversity in agroecosystems. CRC Press ‐Taylor & Francis, ISBN: 9781420049244, 352 p.
6. Giampietro M. (2003) Multi‐scale integrated analysis of agroecosystems. CRCPress ‐ Taylor & Francis, ISBN: 9780849310676, 472 p.
7. Newton P.C.D., Carran R.A., Edwards G.R., Niklaus P.A. (eds) (2006)Agroecosystems in a changing climate. CRC Press ‐ Taylor & Francis, ISBN:9780849320880, 364 p.
8. Braudel F., Coarelli F., Aymard M. (1990) The Mediterranean: the space andthe history. Alexandria Publications, Athens, ISBN: 9789602210154, 205 pages(in Greek)
9. Maravegias N. (editing) (2008) The Mediterranean agriculture in the vortex ofglobalization. Papazisis Publications – Foundation for Mediterranean Studies,Athens, ISBN 9789600222463, 89 pages (in Greek)
‐ Related academic journals:
1. Agriculture and Human Values2. Food Policy3. Supply Chain Management4. Sustainability Science5. Trends in Food Science and Technology6. Journal of Rural Studies7. Development Studies Research
FOOD TOXICOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2800 SEMESTER 5th
COURSE TITLE FOOD TOXICOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the
whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPEgeneral background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY I OR FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐
undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐
15/84‐syllabus‐toxikologia
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to the Qualifications Framework of
the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is twofold. It initially aims at introducing students to the manifold and autonomous scientific field of Toxicology. Students are familiarized with the basic principles governing the science of Toxicology, such as exposure, toxicokinetics and toxicodynamics of xenobiotic substances. Special emphasis is also laid on the mechanisms of chemical carcinogenesis, as well as on the analytical methods used for the detection and the toxicity assessment of xenobiotic substances. At a next step, the course is focused on specific categories of toxic substances that are usually detected on foods either as endogenous naturally occurring food substances or as exogenous substances produced by the human activities. The specific course sections include representative toxic food substances and analyze the mechanisms of actions of these toxic substances and their adverse effects on human
health. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Working independently
Team work
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
‐Introduction – Basic Principles in the Science of Toxicology ‐Absorption and Distribution of Toxicants ‐Storage and Excretion of Toxicants ‐Biotransformation of Toxicants ‐Chemical Carcinogenesis ‐ Natural Toxins in Animal Foodstuffs ‐Toxic Phytochemicals ‐Toxicants Formed During Food Processing ‐ Food Additives ‐ Food Contaminant from Industrial Wastes ‐ Heavy Metals ‐ Pesticides ‐Mycotoxins
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Multiple choice questionnaires, Short‐answer questions, public presentation.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Shibamoto T, Bjeldanes LF (2009). Introduction to Food Toxicology. Taylor SL (Editor), Elsevier Inc., California, USA. ISBN: 978‐0‐12‐374286‐5. 2) Omaye ST (2004). Food and Nutritional Toxicology. CRC Press. ISBN: 1‐58716‐071‐4. 3) Klaassen CD (2008). Casarett & Droull’s Toxicology the Basic Science of Poisons. McGraw‐Hill Companies Inc. ISBN: 0‐07‐159351‐9. 4) Hodgson E (2004). A Textbook of Modern Toxicology. Wiley‐Interscience, New Jersey, USA. ISBN: 0‐471‐26508‐X. 5) Timbrell TA (2009). Principles of Biochemical Toxicology. Informa Healtcare, USA. ISBN: 978‐0‐8493‐7302‐6. 6) Juneja VK, Sofos JN (2009). Pathogens and Toxins in Foods: Challenges and Interventions, ASM Press, 1st edition. ISBN: 978‐1555814595. 7) Riemann HP, Cliver DO (2006). Foodborne Infections and Intoxications. Academic Press, 3rd edition, ISBN: 978‐0‐12‐588365‐8.
NUTRITION & METABOLISM
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2950 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE NUTRITION & METABOLISM
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY II OR BIOCHEMISTRY II
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/373‐nutrition‐
metabolism
https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/FNS136/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of human nutrition issues, backed up byadvanced science textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition and metabolism. • They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate to practicingthe profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientist and have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and nutrition metabolism. • They have developed those general knowledge acquisition skills that they need tocontinue in further studies with a high degree of autonomy, by studying the specific aspects of nutrition science. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on nutrition metabolism issues, which implies a criticalunderstanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solvecomplex and unpredictable problems in the field of human metabolism. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutritionadvice.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aims at:
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutrition andmetabolism with the use of the necessary technology
Adapting to new situations about nutrition metabolism
Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues
Working independently
Team work about nutrition
Working in an international environment
Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management
Respect for difference and multiculturalism
Respect for the natural environment
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to genderissues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Course Syllabus: Review of macronutrients metabolism and the effect of nutrition. Human metabolism during the fasting and post‐absorptive cycle. Factors affecting energy substate utilization. Energy balance: metabolic control and related contributors. Metabolic effects of over‐ and under‐nutrition. Obesity and energy balance and metabolic effects of major methods for weight loss. Micronutrient metabolism and the effect of phytochemicals in human metabolism and physiological functioning. Body fluid balance: water requirements and water effects in helth and human metabolism. Metabolic disturbunces in nutrition related diseases. Exercise and physical activity effects in human metabolism. Laboratory: Presentation and practice of basic techiniques in the study of human metabolism: energy consumption and assessment of relative contribution of energy substrates in energy production. The effect of fasting and eating. Glycemic and lipidemic control in the physiological state and the effect of consumption of meals, differing in macronutrients content.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer, e‐mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 26
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 95
Course total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Assessment of the course is done through a final examination in theory and laboratory and through assessment of the presence of the student during the laboratory exercises (laboratory reports‐exercises, 30% of lab score). The participation of the written
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
examination in the final score is 70% and the laboratory performance is 30%. Both grades (written examination and laboratory grade) should greater than or equal to 5.0 / 10.0).
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Nutrition and Metabolism, S.A. Lanham‐New, I.A. Macdonald, H.M. Roche, The Nutrition Society Textboks, Wiley‐Blackwell, 2011, (ISBN: 978‐1‐4051‐6808‐3).
Nutrition and Metabolism: underlying mechanisms and clinical consequences, C.S. Mantzoros. Humana Press, 2009, (ISBN: 978‐1‐60327‐452‐4).
‐ Related academic journals:
European Journal of Nutrition Nutrition and Metabolism International Journal of Nutrition
FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRATUATE COURSE CODE 3100 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
Theory Lectures 3 5 Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://eclass.aegean.gr/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is the students to understand the basic principles of the main methods of food processing and preservation. Students will get familiar with methods such as blanching, pasteurization, sterilization, canning, aseptic processing, extrusion, cooking, cold storage, freezing, irradiation, high hydrostatic pressure, new non‐thermal processing methods and hurdle technology. After completing the lectures, students will be able to design corresponding methods of food processing and preservation, choose the right
equipment and solve relevant application problems.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
‐Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology ‐ Production of free, creative and inductive thinking ‐ Working in an international environment ‐Working in an interdisciplinary environment ‐ Team work
(3) SYLLABUS
The acquisition of knowledge about subjects related to food processing and preservation. Course Syllabus: Introduction to food processing & preservation, thermal processing with electrical energy, blanching, pasteurization, sterilization, canning, aseptic processing, thermal extrusion, cooking, cold storage, freezing, ionization irradiation, high hydrostatic pressure, new non‐thermal processing methods (high‐intensity pulsed electric fields, intense pulsed light, oscillating magnetic fields), hurdle technology
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150
writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
20 % (Growth topic rating) + 80 % (Final Examination) or 100 % Final Examination
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: ‐I. G. Bloukas, Food Processing & Preservation, Stamoulis Publications, Athens, 2004 ‐B. Kioseoglou, G. Blekas, Principles of Food Technology, Agis‐Savvas Gartaganis Publications, 2010 ‐P. S. Rodi, Food Preservation Methods, Stamoulis Publications, Athens, 1995 ‐C. Tzia, B. Oraiopoulou, Food Preservation & Packaging, N.T.U.A., 2003
‐ Related academic journals: ‐Journal of Food Processing and Preservation (Wiley) ‐Annals of Food Processing and Preservation (JSciMed Central) ‐Journal of Food Processing & Technology (OMICS International) ‐Journal of Food Science and Technology (Springer)
FOOD MICROBIOLOGY IΙ
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2150 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE FOOD MICROBIOLOGY IΙ INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the
credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 7
LABORATORY 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/images/files/syllabus/FOOD_MICROBIOLOGY_II.pdf
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
This course is divided into two thematic areas. The first one is occupied with the main ways used to control the growth of undesirable microorganisms (spoilage, pathogens) in foods, while the second one is occupied with the beneficial effects of useful microorganisms in
foods. With respect to the first area, its aim is to present students the main physical and chemical ways used to prevent microbial growth or /and to kill microorganisms in a food, how each way produces the desirable antimicrobial effect (mode of action) and the parameters affecting this (with respect to the nature of food, the nature of microorganisms and the nature of antimicrobial treatment). Thus, this area focuses on cleaning and disinfection procedures (sanitation), on the death of microorganisms by heat treatment, on the microbiostatic effects of low temperature (refrigeration, freezing) and low water activity (aw), on the reduction of pH value of a food through addition of weak organic acids in order to control microbial growth, on the preservation of foods under modified atmosphere packaging (MAP), on the addition of chemical antimicrobial substances (preservatives) to foods and finally on the germicidal action of food irradiation. With respect to the second area, its aim is to present students the main beneficial aspects of useful microorganisms in foods. Thus, this part focuses on the main types of microorganisms used in food fermentations (lactic acid bacteria), on the microbiology of some fermented foods (yogurt, cheese, fermented sausages and vegetables) and finally on the probiotic microorganisms (Bifidobacterium, Lactobacillus) and their possible positive effects in human health (reducing intestinal disorders, preventing colon cancer, immunomodulation etc). Laboratorial exercises are designed to help students better understand some of the key questions addressed by the theory of the course.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making Working independently Team work Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory. 1. Control of access of microorganisms in foods (sanitation). 2. Control of microorganisms by heat. 3. Control of microorganisms by low temperature. 4. Control of microorganisms by reduced water activity. 5. Control of microorganisms by low pH and organic acids. 6. Control of microorganisms by modified atmosphere. 7. Control of microorganisms by chemical antimicrobial substances (preservatives). 8. Control of microorganisms by irradiation. 9. Microorganisms used in food fermentations. 10. Starter cultures and bacteriophages. 11. Microbiology of main fermented foods (yogurt, cheese,
fermented sausages and vegetables). 12. Beneficial intestinal bacteria (probiotics and effects in human health). Laboratory. 1. Effect of water activity (osmotic pressure) on microbial growth. 2. Estimation of efficacy of chemical antimicrobial agents ‐ Well diffusion assay. 3. Isolation of lactic acid bacteria from fermented milk products (yogurt) and study of biochemical properties (catalase and fermentation tests of carbohydrates). 4. Microbiological examination of water by multi‐fermentation method in tubes (most probable number method). 5. ONPG and IMViC biochemical tests.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
FACE‐TO‐FACE
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures (Theory and Laboratory) are done using PowerPoint presentations. All course notes are available to students at the moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform, communication with students is also made (announcements). Throughout the educational process, students sometimes watch educational videos (https://www.youtube.com/). The final exam is done online (multiple choice, correct / error, matching questions) through the moodle platform.
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 112
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
210
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work,
Student evaluation is done through final examinations (via computer). → Ques ons are in the form of: multiple choice (1 question with 4 possible answers,
of which only one answer is correct), correct / wrong (a suggestion where the student is
asked to judge whether its content is correct orincorrect)
matching (e.g. the organisms of a cell with theirnames).
essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Laboratory is examined independently of the theory of the course, while the final grade of the laboratory participates by 30% in the final grade of the course. A graduate grade (≥5) is required both in theory and in the laboratory so that a student can be considered successful in the class. If one student succeeds in one of the two (theory, laboratory) then the next time (whenever) is examined only in what he/she failed. It is also possible for a student to be examined in the theory in 2 separate examinations → A 'and B' progress. In order to pass the theory through the 2 progressions it must have received at each degree ≥ 5. In this case, the final degree of the theory results from the average of the grades of 2 progressions. If a student fails to progress (and/or if he/she wishes to improve degree), he/she still has the right to be examined in the theory in the final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1.Modern Food Microbiology, Jay J.M., Loessner M.J., Golden D.A., Springer.
2. Fundamental Food Microbiology, Ray B., Bhunia A., CRC Press.
3. Food Microbiology, Adams M.R., Moss M.O., Royal Society of Chemistry.
4. Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle M.P., Beuchat L.R., ASM Press.
‐ Related academic journals:
1. International Journal of Food Microbiology
(https://www.journals.elsevier.com/international‐journal‐of‐food‐microbiology)
2. Food Microbiology (https://www.journals.elsevier.com/food‐microbiology/most‐
downloaded‐articles)
3. Journal of Food Protection (http://jfoodprotection.org/)
4. Frontiers in Microbiology, Section Food Microbiology
(https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/microbiology/sections/food‐microbiology)
5. Foodborne Pathogens and Disease (http://www.liebertpub.com/fpd)
6. Journal of Food Safety (http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1111/(ISSN)1745‐
4565)
PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3550 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY II
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐undergraduates‐studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐15/88‐syllabus‐pathofysiologia
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to present the basic principles governing the etiology, pathogenesis and pathophysiology of chronic human diseases. Students will acquire a fully integrated and functional perception and not just mnemonic, fragmented knowledge of the pathophysiology of chronic diseases related with human nutrition and which may be prevented by the use of
a healthy nutrition behavior. An integrated comprehension of the pathophysiological mechanisms governing disease stated, such as cancer, cardiovascular diseases, endocrinal disorders and malnutrition diseases, is considered as a prerequisite for the students in order to understand the role of foods and nutrition in preventing and promoting of human health. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the
necessary technology Working independently Team work Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
‐ Cancer pathophysiology: Epidemiology, cell proliferation and differentiation, oncogenes, tumor suppressor genes, apoptosis, DNA repair systems, benign and malignant neoplasms, tumor differentiation, histopathological stage, risk factors, mutants, carcinogens, nutrition and cancer. ‐ Cardiovascular diseases pathophysiology: Atherosclerosis: development and progression of atherosclerotic plaques, pathologicanatomic, molecular and cellular approaches, oxidation, inflammation and thrombosis, risk factors, cerebrovascular diseases, coronary disease, peripheral angiopathy. ‐ Malnutrition diseases pathophysiology: Basic definitions: malnutrition, physiology and pathophysiology of adipose tissue, endocrinal functions of adipose tissue, obesity etiology, pathogenesis and pathophysiology, obesity as risk factor for other diseases, childhood obesity, παιδική παχυσαρκία, undernutrition due to the presence of disease, regulation of nutritional behavior, control of satiety and appetite, orexigenic and anorexigenic factors, anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa. ‐ Endocrinal disorders pathophysiology: Endocrinal disorders categories, hypothalamus‐pituitary‐gland/target axis, hypo hypopituitarism, hyperthyroidism, hypothyroidism, hyperparathyroidism, hypoparathyroidism, osteoporosis and estrogens deficiency, adrenal glands disorders: Cushing syndrome, hyperaldosteronism, androgenetic syndrome, diabetes mellitus type I and type II, insulin resistance metabolic syndrome, gestational diabetes, diabetes insipidus.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face ‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39 Autonomous study 111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Multiple choice questionnaires, Short‐answer questions, public presentation.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Carol Mattson Porth (2011). Essentials of Pathophysiology. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.ISBN: 978‐158‐255‐724‐3.
2) Buja LM, Krueger G (2008). Netter Atlas of Principle Medicine Sciences VI: PathologicalAnatomy. Medicine Publisher Paschalidis PC. ISBN: 9603997351. 3) Kitraki Ε., Trougos Κ (2006). Cancer Biology. Medicine Publisher Paschalidis PC.. ISBN: 978‐960‐399‐404‐6. 4) Robin Hesketh (2012). Introduction to Cancer Biology. Cambridge University Press. ISBN:978‐110‐760‐148‐2.
TECHNOLOGY OF FOODS OF PLANT ORIGIN
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3050 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE TECHNOLOGY OF FOODS OF PLANT ORIGIN
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6 LABORATORY 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is the description and understanding of the technological applications relevant to manufacturing of foods of plant origin. Particular emphasis is given on the composition of the raw materials and processing technologies, as well as on their effect on organoleptic characteristics, safety and nutritional value of plant foods. Laboratory course
aims at familiarizing the students with the description and critical analysis of the technological applications, particularly of those pertaining to the nutritional value and functionality of plant foods.
Following successful attendance of the course, the students will be in position to:
Understand basic principles of the technology of major plant foods, including fruit,
vegetables, wines, seed oils and olive oil and bread
Comprehend the role of food microbiology, food chemistry and food biochemistry
in plant food manufacturing, preservation and new food development
Perform representative analyses that pertain to plant food composition
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
(3) SYLLABUS
LECTURE COURSE
Part I: Fruit & vegetables
1. Fruit juices2. Tomato processing3. Minimally processed products
Part II: Wine technology
1. Vine and grapes2. Composition3. Microbiology and bio‐conversions4. Post‐fermentation processes and ageing5. Vinification
Part III: Oil technology
1. Seed oils2. Olive fruit3. Olive oil composition4. Olive oil production
Part IV: Cereal technology
1. Cereals2. Production of bread and confectionary
LABORATORY COURSE
1. Density measurement – Estimation of the potential alcoholic degree2. Measurement of lipid oxidation3. Determination of total polyphenols4. Determination of total anthocyanins
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face. In laboratory courses, following a short
presentation of methodology, students perform
exercises using appropriate instruments/devices.
Furthermore, students are pursuing research problems
/ working hypotheses, within the lab, based on their
experimental data.
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures are supported by overhead projections and other audio material.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching,
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 39
Essays 20
Autonomous study 82
Course total 180 hours
educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
(30h/ECTS)
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The language of evaluation is Greek. Overall course grade comprises of lecture grade (50%) and laboratory grade (50%). Lecture course exams include multiple choice questions. Laboratory course exams include problem solving and short answer and / or multiple‐choice questions.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Kioseoglou I., Blekas V., 2010. Principles of Food Technology, GARTAGANIS editions, GREECE.
BIOSTATISTICS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2300 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE BIOSTATISTICS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5 LABORATORY 2
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIALISED GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
PREREQUISITE COURSES: STATISTICS – QUANTITATIVE METHODS
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes
The course objectives are the following for students
Basic knowledge in advanced principles of statistics suitable for Food Science andNutrition
Understanding of statistics terms and methodology for use in experimental design Expertise in the use of statistical software packages, and programming in statistical
packages Knowledge in evaluating information critically to support research objectives
General Competences
Research and analysis of data using statistical methods Independent work and as a team work
Decision making
(3) SYLLABUS
A) Biostatistics for Food and Nutrition ScientistsPart 1Hypothesis tests Type I and II errors, significance level, power of statistical test, choosing the right statistical method, one‐sided and two‐sided tests, tests for means, differ‐ ences of means, proportions, differences of proportions, tests for the variances, analysis of variances.
Part2: Hypothesis testing for categorical variables, goodness of fit tests Mantel‐Haenszel tests for independence, contingency tables, goodness of fit test in normal distribution, goodness of fit test in multinomial experiments. Part 3: Correlation Correlation, measuring the variables, partial correlation coefficient, linear correlation coefficient, Pearson’s correlation coefficient, Spearman’s rank coefficient, Kendall’s rank correlation coefficient, properties of correlation coefficients. Part 4: Simple linear regression Method of least squares, linear model, mean and variance of estimators, estimation of the variance of error terms, distribution of the least square estimators, confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for least square estimators, coefficient of determination. Part 5: Multiple regression The linear model, assumptions and extensions, ANalysis Of Variance (ANOVA)
B) Biostatistics in personal computersUse of statistical methods for data analysis using the statistical software package R.Programming in R language. Descriptive statistics, t test of dependent andindependent samples, one way anova, pearson correlation coefficient, linear fit, chisquare test. The data are related to Food Science and Nutrition.Lab exercises
1. Data collection from and by students related to Food Science andNutrition (e.g. height, weight, nutrition habits e.t.c.)
2. Commands for Descriptive statistics (reading and presenting data)3. Statistical Inference: random samples, confidence intervals, sampling
theory4. Statistical Inference: t test, chi square test, Fisher’s test5. One way ANOVA and simple linear regression
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face:
Classroom (theory and exercises) Lab work (practice with the statistical software
package R)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory
Course handouts and transparencies in pdf format Email communication between students and lecturer (e class)
education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODS Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39 Laboratory exercises 26 Essays 20 Autonomous study 65
Course Total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
.
Language of evaluation: Greek Method of evaluation
Final exam paper (70% of total mark) Obligatory presence at labs (at least) 90% of
labs Average of ten lab exercises (30% of total
mark)
Evaluation criteria are presented and analysed to students at start of semester
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
‐ Related academic journals:
APPLIED INFORMATICS FOR FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 2450 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE APPLIED INFORMATICS FOR FOOD SCIENCE AND
NUTRITION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4 LABORATORY 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: INFORMATICS – DATABASES
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
‐
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/356‐application‐informatics
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Knowledge of basic informatics applications in food science and nutrition. Understanding the role of informatics in research process functioning. Comprehension of the importance of informatics to the scientific study of
contemporary issues in food science and nutrition.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology.
Adapting to new situations. Decision‐making. Working in an international environment. Working in an interdisciplinary environment. Production of new research ideas. Production of free, creative and inductive thinking.
(3) SYLLABUS
During the course are given weekly lectures that include: 1) Basic characteristics of informatics (2 lectures).2) Search of literature (scientific articles, books, encyclopedias and dictionaries) to
specialized databases on the internet (3 lectures).3) Data analysis using computational tools and programming language R (mathematical
and statistical calculations, graphics, design of algorithms) (3 lectures).4) Design and study of chemical compounds with the use of specialized design tools (3
lectures).5) Search of biological characteristics of organisms in biological databases and use of
bioinformatics tools (1 lecture).6) Search of nutritional characteristics of foods in nutritional databases and diets design (1
lecture).
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Yes, using a projector, internet access and viewing of audiovisual material (documentaries)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39 Laboratory exercises 26 Autonomous study 52 Written Exam 3
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
‐ Final written examination (80% of the final grade), in Greek, with questions of: (a) Short‐answer and (b) Solving problems and exercises. ‐ Laboratory Practice (20% of the final grade). Detailed instructions for the teaching material and evaluation process are provided on the web‐platform https://eclass.aegean.gr
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1. Kossidas S. (2010) Bioinformatics. New Technologies Publications, Athens, ISBN: 978‐960‐93‐09608, 250 pages (in Greek)
2. Baxevanis A.D., Ouellette B.F. (2004) Bioinformatics, 2nd Edition (editing: E.N.Moudrianakis, S.I. Chamodrakas). Parisianou Publications, Athens, ISBN: 978‐960‐394‐2221, 574 pages (in Greek)
3. Jones N.C., Pavel A.P. (2010) Introduction to bioinformatics algorithms (editing: G.Stamou). Kleidarithmos Publications, Athens, 496 pages (in Greek)
‐ Related academic journals: 1. Pharmaceutical Medicine2. Plos Computational Biology3. Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology4. International Journal of Medical Informatics5. Nutritional Sciences Journal
DAIRY TECHNOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES COURSE CODE 3750 SEMESTER 6th
COURSE TITLE DAIRY TECHNOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES COURSE 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=
410
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The students will: 1. acquire the basic knowledge in Milk Technology
2. have the ability to use the acquired knowledge during milk processing
3. have all the required knowledge and skills in order to continue their studies.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
This module aims so that the degree‐holder will acquire the following cοmpetences: 1. critical thinking2. decision making3. problem handling
(3) SYLLABUS
Lectures: Milk nutritional value, milk componets: proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, vitamins, minerals and their technological properties, milk quality, milk microbiology, thermal processing of milk, mastitis, milk adulteration, dairy products of Protected Designation of Origin (PDO) .
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer usage to conduct the lectures. Supporting the learning process through asynchronous e‐learning (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Evaluation of students is performed by multiple choice‐questions in Greek language through a written final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1.Dairy Science and Technology, Second Edition, P. Walstra, Pieter Walstra, Jan T. M.
Wouters Tom J. Geurts, CRC press Taylor & Francis, 2010
‐ Related academic journals:
FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES COURSE CODE 3200 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=137
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The students will: 1. acquire the basic knowledge in Food Safety and Quality
2. have the ability to implement HACCP system during the food production process
3. have all the required knowledge and skills in order to continue their studies.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
This module aims so that the degree‐holder will acquire the following cpmtetences: 1. critical thinking2. decision ‐making3. production of quality food products4. problem handling
(3) SYLLABUS
Lectures: Food quality ‐ food quality charactiristics, Absolute Safety, Relative Food Safety, Quality Assurance, Total Quality Managment, Haccp System, Prerequisite Programms (PRP), Food Hazards, Food Hazard Analysis, 7 Haccp Principles.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning, etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer usage to conduct the lectures. Supporting the learning process through asynchronous e learning (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures Course 39
Autonomous Study 111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Evaluation of students is performed by multiple choice‐questions in Greek language through a written final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1. Haccp, a Systematic Approach to Food Safety, Virginia N. Scott, Kenneth E. Stevenson,
Food Products Association, 2006
‐ Related academic journals:
DEGREE DISSERTATION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 3600 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE DEGREE DISSERTATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER
HOURS CREDITS
STUDY OF BIBLIOGRAPHY, LABORATORY RESEARCH, WRITING, PRESENTATION
450 15
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: 30 CORE COURSES AND 7 ELECTIVE COURSES
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Upon the successful completion of their Degree Dissertation Students will have acquired the skills to: • search for and find scientific information in scientific sources• design and organize research• conduct research
• process research data• evaluate and compare research data and results• write scientific texts• organize and present research data and results
Students after having successfully completed their Degree Dissertation also acquire specific knowledge in a particular scientific area.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
1. Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology
2. Adapting to new situations
3. Decision‐making
4. Working independently
5. Team work
6. Production of new research ideas
7. Project planning and management
8. Criticism and self‐criticism
9. Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. Searching Bibliography2. Studying Bibliography3. Design an Experiment4. Performing Research5. Processing and evaluating research data6. Writing Degree Dissertation7. Presenting Degree Dissertation
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Search Scientific Bibliography
(https://www.scopus.com/ ; http://apps.webofknowledge.com ) Communicating with students via email Multimedia presentation using presentation software
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Search for bibliography 20
Study of bibliography 30
Research design 30
Research 150
Process and evaluate research data
80
Presentation of the Degree Dissertation
20
Course total (30h/ECTS)
450
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The students are evaluated in Greek by oral presentation and written submission of their Degree Dissertation by a three‐member examination committee
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Student's Guide: Final Year Project Thesis: BSc, MSc, MA, and MBA. by Dr Fadi Safieddine (Author), Dr Koba Lomidze (Editor), CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 2nd Edition edition, 2015
‐ Related academic journals:
ENGLISH III
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 3800 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE ENGLISH III
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
GENERAL BACKGROUND, SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ENGLISH II
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
ENGLISH
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
After the successful completion of the course the students will be able:
to read and comprehend texts of general and scientific interest in the Englishlanguage, as well as to apply reading strategies according to the purpose of reading
to comprehend presentations, speeches and lectures and to keep constructive
notes
to compose a text suitably, such as a description, a comparison, an analysis, a lab report, a scientific article
to use the English language according to purpose and audience
to study texts containing terminology relevant to their field of studies
to compose academic papers/academic writing theory
to communicate in an English speaking environment
to compose their CV
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Use of Information Technology Autonomous work Team work Working in an international environment Respect for difference and multiculturalism
(3) SYLLABUS
Grammar/Syntax:
Tenses
Types of subordinate clauses
Special constructions
Indirect Speech
Passive voice
Subjunctive Writing:
Types of writing
Composing a Paragraph
Composing medium‐length and long texts [article, paper etc]
Composing a Summary
Composing a Statistics Report
Composing a Lab Report
Composing a CV Vocabulary:
Texts with terminology relevant to the field of studies
Texts of general interest relevant to the field of studies
Listening activities of various types
(Presentation)
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching and for communication with students (aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr) Use of e‐mail for communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 78
Final written exam 3
Course total (30h/ECTS )
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation
Three‐hour written exam in English, that consists of: Reading Comprehension passage with questions
Vocabulary activities [open/closed type]
Grammar activities [closed and open type]
Academic writing theory
Writing on a given topic
criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: Mary Spratt, Bob Obee. “Mission IELTS 2 ACADEMIC”. Express Publishing, 2014.
John Slaght, Anne Pallant. “English for Academic Study Source Book: Reading &
Writing”. University of Reading: Garnet Education, 2012.
V. Pagoulatou‐Vlachou. “Intermediate Grammar and Exercises”. ExpressPublishing, 1991.
Bob Obee & Virginia Evans. “CPE Practice Tests 1”. Express Publishing, 2013.
Mark Skipper. “Advanced grammar & vocabulary”. Express Publishing, 2002.
Effie Lambadaridou.”Academic Writing: The Critical Essay”. Εκδόσεις Συμμετρία,1994.
‐ Related academic journals:
BIOPROCESSES FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF SUSTAINABLE AND INNOVATIVE FOOD PRODUCTS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 4150 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE BIOPROCESSES FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF
SUSTAINABLE AND INNOVATIVE FOOD PRODUCTS INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/35‐general‐
en/curriculum‐cat/curriculum‐14‐15/540‐syllabus‐
bioprocesses
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of this course to train and educate students in producing food products by employing bioprocesses while simultaneously meeting the principles of sustainable development. Within this frame, students will expand their cognitive background in the field
of bioprocess engineering, meaning the application of engineering principles required for designing, operating and optimizing laboratory and industrial bioprocesses. Also, they will become aware of novel production processes, leading to the production of a wide range of innovative products. Finally, students will become familiar with bioprocesses design and preliminary techno‐economic analysis. Thus summarizing, after finishing lectures‐presentations, students will:
Have proven knowledge of food bioprocessing related issues, leading to the production of traditional and innovative products with nutritional interest, supported by advanced level scientific results, including modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of food bioprocessing.
Be able to exercise the profession of Food and Nutrition Scientist Be able to express ideas and their acquired knowledge, in designing, optimizing and
costing novel food bioprocessing production lines as well as solve problems and propose solutions to both skilled and non‐specialized interested parties to specific cases, relevant to the production of innovative food products through bio‐processes.
Thus summarizing at the end of the course‐ lectures students may: Have advanced and up to date knowledge in the field of designing, producing,
costing and assessing environmental impacts of the whole process that leads to the production of traditional and innovative food products through bio‐processes. As logical, this will become feasible since students through training will be encouraged to develop critical point of view through practical application of theories and principles in the interdisciplinary field of food bioprocessing.
Have advanced skills and the ability to demonstrate them by efficiently acting and solving complex and unpredictable problems in the field of Food Bioprocessing and in general the wide field of Food Science and Nutrition.
Have the ability to train professionally individuals and all interested parties in food bioprocessing and technology that lead to the production of novel production lines in a sustainable manner, ensuring the nutritional value and functionality of the end bioprocessed foods.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
At the end of the course students will have developed the following competences: Understand current trends and state‐of‐the‐art of scientific data and studies. Search, analysis and synthesis of data and information on cutting‐edge issues in the
field of Food bioprocessing leading to the production of food products, with nutritional value in an efficient and sustainable manner
Making decisions on setting up and selecting the most appropriate bio‐processingsystem (required each time) for the development of innovative food products
Teamwork
Develop new research ideas
Respect natural environment by promoting sustainable development principles andby applying environmental impact analysis in novel food bioprocessing productionlines.
Exercise of criticism and self‐criticism, aiming at continuous scientific, moral andself‐improvement.
Promote free and creative thinking
Working in an international environment
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS
Introduction. Microorganisms and bioprocesses.
Enzymes and bioprocesses.
Fermentation processes and engineering technologies.
Selection, scale up, operation and control of bioreactors.
Recovery and purification strategies of products. Modified bioreactors.
Bio‐products: Types, bioprocesses, uses and applications in food technology andnutrition field.
Bioactive secondary metabolites.
Natural and innovative functional foods.
Industrial bioprocesses for product development (case studies). Integratedbiorefineries.
Sustainable development. Life cycle assessment of food products and bioprocesses.Case studies.
Introduction to industrial bioprocesses design and development of preliminarytechno‐economic analyses.
Estimation of total production bioprocess cost analysis (TCA). Factors andmethodologies determining total production cost.
Techno‐economic analysis of whole bioprocess design leading to the production ofinnovative products with nutritional value (bioprocess simulation software).Profitability analysis. Specific case‐study.
Presentation of assignments.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer, mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Assessment of the course is done through a final examination and through a teamwork assessment. The aim of the work is the production of food products through bioprocessing technology and its presentation in the course. The participation of the written examination in the final mark is 70% and the evaluation of the work 25%. Both grades (written examination and teamwork assignment) should be greater than or equal to 5.0
Language of evaluation: Greek
Written exam‐70 % of the final mark: multiplechoice questionnaires, short answer questions,problem solving
Teamwork assignment – 25 % of the finalgrade
Public presentation – 5% of the final grade
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: Aberoumand A. 2011. A review article on edible pigments properties and sources as
natural biocolorants in foodstuff and food industries. World Journal Dairy Food
Science. 6:71‐78.
Babbar N, Oberoi S. 2014. Potential of agro‐residues as sources of bioactive
compounds. In Biotransformation of waste biomass into high value biochemicals.
Springer. 261‐295.
Βali V, Panesar PS, Bera MB, Panesar R. 2015. Fructo‐oligosaccharides: production,
purification and potential applications. Critical Reviews in Food Science and
Nutrition.55(11): 1475‐90.
Brienzo M, Carvalho W, Milagres AMF. 2010. Xylooligosaccharides production from
alkali pretreated sugarcane bagasse using xylanase from Thermoascus aurantiacus.
Applied Biochemistry and Biotechnology. 162:1195‐1205.
Dimou C, Vlysidis A, Kopsahelis N, Papanikolaou S, Koutinas AA, Kookos IK. 2016.
Techno‐economic analysis of wine lees valorisation for the production of high value
added products. Biochemical Engineering Journal.
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.bej.2016.09.004.
Kamm B, Gruber P, Kamm M. 2006. Biorefineries – Industrial Processes and Products.
Status Quo and Future Directions. Volume 2. Wiley VCH.
Kumar A, Sengupta B, Dasgupta D, Mandal T, Datta S. 2016. Recovery of value added
products from rice husk ash to explore an economic way for recycle and reuse of
agricultural waste.Reviewsin Environmental Science and Bio/Technology. 15:47‐65.
Maroulis ZB, Saravacos GD. 2003. Food process design. Marcel Dekker, New York.
Nour V, Ionica ME, Trandafir I. 2015. Bread enriched in lycopene and other bioactive
compounds by addition of dry tomato paste. Journal of Food Science and Technology.
52 (12): 8260‐8267.
Stabnikova O, Wang JW, Ivanov Volodymyr. 2014. Value added biotechnological
products from organic wastes. IN Handbook of environmental engineering. Volume 10.
Humana Press. p 343‐394.
‐ Related academic journals: Food and Bioprocess Technology Journal
Food and Bioproducts Processing
Critical Reviews in Food Science and Nutrition
International Journal of Food Bioprocess Engineering
Biochemical Engineering Journal
Biotechnology & Bioprocess Engineering
Environmental Science and Bio/Technology
Mechanical Engineering Journal
GENETICS AND NUTRITION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3500 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE GENETICS AND NUTRITION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: CELL BIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The students who successfully complete the course describe the application of the fundamental principles of genetics to nutrigenetics, nutrigenomics and epigenetics science, analyzing diseases pathogenesis caused by genetic and nutritional interactions as well as considering the importance of nutritional prevention and treatment by individualized nutrition which improving the quality of public health.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology
Decision‐making
Project planning and management
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
Production of new research ideas
(3) SYLLABUS
The aim of the course is to study the interactions between individual genetic load and diet. Understanding the correlation between diet, genome and certain pathological conditions is particularly important for nutritional prevention, nutritional healing and hence improving public health. For this purpose, the lectures initially refer to the fundamental principles of genetics and genomics. Subsequently, the concepts of nutrigenetics, nutrigenomics and epigenetics are analyzed, while specific examples related to the interaction between genes, nutrients / bioactive food components health and diseases, evidenced by the literature, are reported (i.e. metabolic syndrome, insulin resistance, diabetes mellitus, phenylketonuria, galactosemia, tyrosinemia, hemochromatosis, celiac disease , lactose intolerance, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, dyslipidemia, bone diseases, gastrointestinal disorders, neoplastic diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, tumors). It is also analyzed the role of intestinal microflora (microbiome) in diet and its impact on consumer health. In addition, a presentation of current dietary and genetic laboratory analysis (BI‐OMICS technologies) is presented, while the role of genetic counseling is discussed, and how these two factors can contribute to a personalized nutrition. Finally, reference is made to bioethical and deontological ethics regarding the personalized nutrition through genetic analysis.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching and communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Language of evaluation: Greek
Methods of evaluation: Oral examination,Public presentation ( Optional)
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
BOOK TITLE: Βασικές Αρχές Γενετικής
ISBN: 978‐618‐5135‐03‐4 AUTHORS: W. S. Klug, M. R. Cummings, C. A. Spencer, M. A. Palla EDITOR: Ακαδημαϊκές Εκδόσεις ‐ Ι. Μπάσδρα & Σια Ο.Ε. YEAR OF EDITION: 2016 LOCATION EDITION: Αλεξανδρούπολη
‐ Related academic journals:
N. M. R. Sales, P. B. Pelegrini, and M. C. Goersch. Nutrigenomics: Definitions and Advances of This New Science. Journal of Nutrition and Metabolism (2014), Article ID 202759.
http://dx.doi.org/10.1155/2014/202759
Ligi Paul. Diet, nutrition and telomere length. Journal of Nutritional Biochemistry 22 (2011)
895–901
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jnutbio.2010.12.001
Rodrigo San‐Cristobal, Fermín I. Milagro, J. Alfredo Martínez. Future Challenges and Present Ethical Considerations in the Use of Personalized Nutrition Based on Genetic Advice. JOURNAL OF THE ACADEMY OF NUTRITION AND DIETETICS, 2013; Vol. 113 N. 11
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jand.2013.05.028
Stankiewicz, P. & Lupski, J. R. Structural variation in the human genome and its role in
disease. Annual Review of Medicine (2010); 61, 437–55.http://doi.org/10.1146/annurev‐med‐100708‐204735
Linda S. Zhang and Sean S. Davies. Microbial metabolism of dietary components to bioactive metabolites: opportunities for new therapeutic Interventions. Genome Medicine (2016) 8:46
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13073‐016‐0296‐x
Kohlmeier et al. Guide and Position of the ISNN on Personalized Nutrition: Part 2 –Ethics, Challenges and Endeavors of Precision Nutrition. J Nutrigenet Nutrigenomics 2016; 9:28–46 DOI: 10.1159/000446347
Artemis P. Simopoulos. Nutrigenetics/Nutrigenomics. Annu. Rev. Public Health 2010; 31:53–68 doi: 10.1146/annurev.publhealth.031809.130844
Ramos‐Lopez et al. Guide for Current Nutrigenetic, Nutrigenomic, and Nutriepigenetic Approaches for Precision Nutrition Involving the Prevention and Management of Chronic Diseases Associated with Obesity. J Nutrigenet Nutrigenomics 2017;10:43–62 DOI: 10.1159/000477729
Rhianna C. Laker, Mary E. Wlodek, Jessica J. Connelly, Zhen Yan. Epigenetic origins of metabolic disease: The impact of the maternal condition to the offspring epigenome and later health consequences. Food Science and Human Wellness 2 (2013) 1–11
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.fshw.2013.03.002
SPORTS AND EXERCISE NUTRITION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL ENVIROMENT ACADEMIC UNIT FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 5100 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE SPORTS AND EXERCISE NUTRITION INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY II OR BIOCHEMISTRY II
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of nutrition issues during physical activity, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of sport nutrition. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both qualified and non‐specialized people about sport nutrition. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on sport nutrition science issues, which implies a critical understanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of sports nutrition. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutrition advice relevant to sport nutrition, exercise and physical activity.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aim at: Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about sport
nutrition science, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations about sport nutrition science Decision‐making relative to sport nutrition issues Working independently Team work about nutrition Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to
gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Basic issues about exercise, physical activity and sports, Nutritional metabolism, Energy balance, Weight loss and weight maintenance, Macronutrient needs depending on type of exercise, Micronutrients requirements depending on type of exercise, Liquid and electrolyte requirements during exercise, Nutritional supplements and exercise, Nutrition programs for preparation for a sport event or intense physical activity, Nutrition programs during exercise anda sport competition, Nutrition programs after physical activity.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face to face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer, mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures 39 Autonomous Study 81
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation,
Assessment of the course is done through a written examination (multiple choice and critical thinking questions).
methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: Mc Ardle, Katch, Katch. Sports and Exercise Nutrition, 2005 ‐ Related academic journals: Journal of the International Society of Sports Nutrition
MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATION AND NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3150 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATION AND NEW PRODUCT
DEVELOPMENT
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTOURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
Instruction Language: Greek Examination Language: Greek Case Studies Language: English
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
This course is designed to provide a comprehensive coverage of innovation management and new product development. Emphasis will be placed on both theory and implementation of innovation management. The course structure will support students to gain the knowledge and skills they need for innovation management and new product development.
Within this context, each module includes a case study suitable for class discussion. The cases are short enough to serve as illustrations, but have sufficient content to serve as the basis of the module. Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to: Critically discuss and analyze the concepts of new product development and innovation Demonstrate an ability to engage in entrepreneurial and innovation processes for new
product development Create, analyze and critically evaluate new business models and innovation plans Develop case study analysis skills (specifically, identifying critical issues in case studies and
applying course material to case studies Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to: Critically discuss and analyze the concepts of new product development and innovation Demonstrate an ability to engage in entrepreneurial and innovation processes for new
product development Create, analyze and critically evaluate new business models and innovation plans Develop case study analysis skills (specifically, identifying critical issues in case studies and
applying course material to case studies
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Creativity, new product development and innovation are integral to an organization’s ability to survive and thrive in today’s competitive marketplace. The course structure provides students with an understanding of how creativity and innovation can be facilitated and managed in a work setting. Students will learn about theoretical conceptualizations of creativity and innovation as well as practical applications involved in fostering creativity and innovation for new product development. Students will be expected to play an active role in learning through class exercises, class discussions, and presentations about real (or planned) innovations in organizations.
(3) SYLLABUS
New Product Development refers to the process of developing new products, or improving existing ones. Central to this activity are entrepreneurs: innovative and risk‐taking individuals who seek to bring about change and new opportunities, both for themselves and for the business communities in which they operate. Such persons play a vital important role in commerce, trade, and economic growth in many nations, through the practice of
innovation. Innovation Management and New Product Development course provides students with the knowledge and techniques required to improve product quality and process efficiency by identifying and measuring production process variability which, if not successfully addressed, leads to inconsistent product quality, costly wastage, non‐standardization and other reliability and productivity problems. A significant focus of the course is the key element of entrepreneurship, innovation. Innovation is an important prerequisite for gaining a competitive advantage and for building a strong and sustainable business. Modern thriving enterprises demand constant levels of innovation. The scope and richness of theoretical developments in the discipline of innovation, offers potential for students to develop substantial skills in understanding the discipline, its role in new product development and in the development of successful, contemporary organizations. This will enable students to deal successfully with dynamic demands from markets and customers that are becoming even more sophisticated and knowledgeable. The course structure will support students to gain the knowledge and skills they need for innovation management and new product development. Within this context, each module includes a case study suitable for class discussion. The cases are short enough to serve as illustrations, but have sufficient content to serve as the basis of the module. This course is designed to provide a comprehensive coverage of innovation management and new product development. Emphasis will be placed on both theory and implementation of innovation management.
To enhance students awareness and comprehension of Innovation Management and New Product Development management challenges module themes and lectures have been allocated as follows:
Part 1 Understanding Innovation and New Product Development Lecture 1 ‐ Definitions and evolution of new product development and innovation Lecture 2 ‐ Role of innovation in entrepreneurship and organizational development Part 2 Innovation and Product Design Lecture 3 ‐ Innovation as a capability / core competence Lecture 4 ‐ Understanding entrepreneurial and innovative behavior Lecture 5 ‐ Role of innovation in new product development Lecture 6 ‐ Role of Technology, Culture and Champions in new product development Part 3 Innovation Management Lecture 7 ‐ Implementing and Managing Innovation Lecture 8 ‐ Measuring Innovation Performance Lecture 9 ‐ The management of research & development Lecture 10 ‐ Capturing value from innovation and Learning from others
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY
Use of University’s e‐Learning platform for providing access to class material, lectures and case studies
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students TEACHING METHODS
The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Essays 20
Autonomous study 61
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
To master the theory of the course lectures; subject logic and systematic relationship with real business practice are conveyed. Practical skills of innovation management are trained doing tasks related to theory, and analyzing real case studies. Students’ presentation skills will be enhanced by doing short presentations in class. The perception of theory is examined through final exam which includes the test with multiple choice and open questions. Group assignments are used to assess students’ abilities in analyzing case studies and solving innovation management problems. • Final Exam (test) comes to 60 % of final grade• Group assignments that help to master theory of thecourse come to 30 % of final grade •Participation in class discussion comes to 10 % of finalgrade
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: (Basic Textbook) 1. Innovation Management & New Product Development (5th Edition), Prentice Hall,Pearson Trott, Paul. (2011), (ISBN : 0273736566 (Supplementary Textbooks) 1. Managing Innovation: Integrating Technological, Market, and Organizational Change, 2ndEdition, John Bessant, Joe Tidd, Keith Pavitt (2013) (ISBN: 0131497863) 2. Innovation and Entrepreneurship, 3rd Edition, John Bessant, Joe Tidd, 2015 (ISBN:0307336697).
3. Meeting the Innovation Challenge: Leadership for Transformation and Growth, ScottIsaksen, Joe Tidd, 2006, (ISBN: 978‐0‐470‐02919‐0). 4. Handbook of New Product Development Management, Christoph H. Loch, StylianosKavadias., Taylor and Francis, 2011 (ISBN: 978‐0‐7506‐8552‐8). 5. Portfolio Management for New Products, 2nd Edition. Robert G. Cooper, Scott J. Edgett,and Elko J. Kleinschmidt, Perseus Publishing, 2001, (ISBN: 0‐7382‐0514‐1) 6. Winning at New Products: Creating Value Through Innovation, Robert G. Cooper., BasicBooks, 2011 (ISBN: 9780465025848) ‐ Suggested Academic Journals 1. European Journal of Innovation Management, Emerald Insight2. Creativity and Innovation Management, Wiley Online Library3. Journal of Product Innovation Management, Wiley Online Library4. Technovation, Elsevier, ScienceDirect
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN FOOD SCIENCE
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES COURSE CODE 4500 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE NANOTECHNOLOGY IN FOOD SCIENCE
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
Theory Lectures 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes
Knowledge in a top research area relating Nanotechnology and Food Science Connection of Food Science through Nanotechnology with areas such as Physics, Materials Science, Chemistry for Research and Development for the future
General Competences
Independent work. Project planning and management. New research ideas. Productionof free, creative and inductive thinking Decision making.
(3) SYLLABUS
Nanostructures. Physics of nanostructures. Biocompatible non toxic environmental methods for nanoparticle synthesis. Characterisation techniques for nanostructures. Microfluids. Biosensors. Nanotechnology in Food packaging. Nanotechnology in specialised nutrition supplements. Nanotechnology and antibacterial action in food related pathogens.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face to face: Lectures in classroom
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Powerpoint presentations in pdf format Email communication with students.
TEACHING METHODS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Evaluation of students is performed by open‐ended questions and problem solving in Greek language through a written final exam (50%) Evaluation from sort project dissertation (50%) Evaluation criteria are presented to the students at the beginning of semester
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
ORGANOLEPTIC EVALUATION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES COURSE CODE 3350 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE ORGANOLEPTIC EVALUATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the
credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 2 6 LABORATORY 3
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD CHEMISTRY II, STATISTICS ‐ QUANTITATIVE METHODS
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=148
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
With the successful completion of the course of organoleptic evaluation:
Students acquire knowledge on basic concepts of physiology and psychophysics
regarding human senses, and on specific tests that apply to the food organoleptic evaluation through human senses.
Students understand the role of human physiology in sensory properties of foodperception, and 0
the requirements as well as limitations concerning application of food organolepticevaluation tests
Students have the skills to choose the appropriate test for food organolepticevaluation through the human senses
Students get acquainted with the application of food organoleptic evaluation tests,the collection and statistical processing of data and the presentation of the results
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Retrieve, analyze and synthesize data and information, with the use of necessarytechnologies
Work autonomously
Work in teams
Design and management of experiments
Be critical and self‐critical
Advance free, creative and causative thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
THEORY • Introduction to food Organoleptic Evaluation• Rules of good practice in sensory analysis• Fundamentals of anatomy and physiology of taste• Basic principles of anatomy and physiology of smell• The somatosensory system and the senses of hearing and touch• Basic concepts of psychophysics and identification of recognition thresholds• Basic concepts of psychophysics and the use of scaling
• Differentiation tests• Descriptive Analysis Testing: Taste and Sense• Descriptive Analysis Tests: vision, touch, hearing• Preference Tests• Acceptance Tests
LABORATORY • Recognizing tastes• Sweet intensity of different sweeteners• Temperature influence on sweet intensity• Desensitization of taste and smell receptors• Threshold determination for basic flavors• Recognition of foods by taste• Recognition of food by smell• Recognition of food by flavor• The effect of the sense of vision on the sense of taste• Pair differentiation test• Triangle differentiation test• Duo trio differentiation test• Differentiation test by ranking• Quantitative Descriptive Analysis
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Multimedia presentations and presentation software usage Email communication with students Support of Learning Process via the electronic moodle platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures atendance 26
Laboratory exercises 39
Laboratory reports 20
Autonomous study 95
Course total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Students are evaluated in Greek language through a final written examination with short‐answer questions and problem solving on both theory and laboratory practice. The degree of this final examination counts for 80% of the final grade of the course
Students are also evaluated by written laboratory reports on the understanding of the principle of the methodology used, the presentation and statistical processing of the experiment data and the evaluation of the result. The average of the grades of laboratory reports counts for 20% of the final grade of the course.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Organoleptic Evaluation of Food, Tsaknis I., Papasotiriou Pub., 1st Edition, 2013 (in
Greek)
Experimental Desing and Statistical Analysis, Komilis D., Markou I. G Pub., 1st Edition,
2012 (in Greek)
Statistical Analysis for Experimental Desing, Kitsos, C., New Tech Pub., 1st Edition,
1994 (in Greek)
Quality Control Production, Papargiris A., Papargiris D., Ziti Pub., 1st Edition, 2010 (in
Greek)
Stracture aesthetic evaluation of food of animal origin, Georgakis S. (Cooperation: A.
Manti, P. Vareltzi, A.Georgaki), Kyriakidis Bros Pub, 1st Edition, 2012 (in Greek)
Research and Development of new Food and Beverage products, Sflomos K., Varzakas
T., Sflomos K. Pub, 1st Edition, 2015 (In Greek)
Wine and Spirits, Soufleros E. Ir., Soufleros E. Ir Pub., 2nd Edition, 2000.
‐ Related academic journals:
Journal of sensory studies
Food Quality and Preference
Trends in food sensory science
FOOD PACKAGING
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 3650 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE FOOD PACKAGING
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://eclass.aegean.gr/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is the students to understand the basic principles of packaging and to use it in the processing, preservation, distribution and promotion of food products, to familiarize themselves with the available packaging materials, to understand how to link materials to safety, quality and shelf life of foods and to compare packaging materials to each other and understand their differences and similarities. After finishing the lectures, students will be able to choose the appropriate packaging materials and types in relation to
the food that is to be packaged as well as to understand any problems that may occur due to inappropriate packaging. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Team work Working in an international environment Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Introductory concepts of food packaging, Factors affecting negatively food and packaging, Food packaging types, Ideal packaging, Plastic packaging, Polymers, Thermoplastic‐Thermosetting polymers, Mechanical properties of polymers, Basic plastics for packaging, Manufacture of plastic packaging, Flexible packaging, Metal packaging, Usual metals for packaging, Stainless steel, Tinplate, Aluminum, Copper, Two and three‐piece cans, Glass packaging, Types of glass containers, Advantages, Disadvantages, Modern trends in glass containers’ production, Food processing in glass containers, Ceramics, Paper packaging, Paper – Cardboard, Production, Advantages, Disadvantages, Types of paper packaging, Recycling
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials,
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total 120 hours
placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
(30h/ECTS)
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
40% (Growth topic rating) + 60% (Degree of final examination) or 100% Degree of Final Examination
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
‐I. G. Bloukas, Food Packaging, Stamoulis Editions, Athens, 2004 ‐S.E. Papadakis, Food Packaging, Tziolas Editions, Thessaloniki, 2010 ‐F. A. Paine, H.Y. Paine, A Handbook of food packaging, 2nd Ed., Blackie Academic & Professional, 1992 ‐S. J. Risch, Food packaging: Testing methods and applications, American Chemical Society, 2000 ‐K. Tzia, V. Oraiopoulou, Food preservation & packaging, N. T. U. A., 2003 ‐I. S. Arvanitiogiannis, L. Mposnea, Elements of food processing and packaging technology, University Studio Press, 2001
‐ Related academic journals:
‐Food Packaging and Shelf Life (Elsevier) ‐Journal of Food Science (Wiley) ‐International Journal of Food Science (Hindawi)
FOOD HYGIENE AND CONSUMER BEHAVIOR
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 4450 SEMESTER 7th
COURSE TITLE FOOD HYGIENE AND CONSUMER BEHAVIOR
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (4).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/login/index.php
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
This is an introductory course to food hygiene and food safety. It aims to familiarize the students with (i) the terms of food quality, food hygiene and food safety, (ii) the differences between microbiological food safety and microbiological food quality, (iii) the biological, chemical and physical hazards encountered in foods and (iv) the basic hygienic codes of
practice given in terms of Good Manufacturing/Hygienic Practices (GMPs/GHPs), which are also considered prerequisites for HACCP and the implementation of food safety management systems.
Moreover, the course is dealing with the behavior of the end user (food consumer) towards its awareness and training on food hygiene and food safety issues, regarding particularly its attitude in the kitchen. Common misconceptions of consumer behavior in the domestic practice of handling and processing foods are described, by providing also a variety of examples.
The course’s main objective is the comprehension by the students of the key principles and concepts of Food Hygiene for assuring food SQA; Safety, Quality and Acceptability. The course also aims to study food consumer’s behavior and to analyze the way food consumers’ think and act, especially in their kitchen, by addressing situations that can jeopardize food safety and hence human health itself.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making
Team work
Production of new research ideas
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
Problem solving skills
(3) SYLLABUS
1. Introduction to Food Hygiene and basic concepts – Terms and definitions.2. Food Quality and Food Hygiene – Practices for ensuring hygiene and microbiological
safety of foods – Distinction between microbiological food safety and quality –Assurance of food SQA: Safety, Quality and Acceptability.
3. Codex Alimentarius: Basic texts on food hygiene – General principles of foodhygiene – Hygiene infrastructure in the food industry, Good Hygiene/ManufacturingPractices (GHPs/GMPs) – Cleaning and disinfection, personal hygiene of foodindustry personnel – Consumer awareness.
4. Food hazards – Characteristics of hazards, growth limits of main pathogenicmicroorganisms, microbial association of different foods and most commonlyencountered hazards on them (potentially hazardous foods) – Hygiene indicatormicroorganisms.
5. Food consumer behavior – Definition, factors influencing consumer behavior,usefulness, characteristics, motivation to shape consumer behavior.
6. Common misconceptions of consumer behavior in the domestic practice (e.g.refrigeration and chilling of foods, use of utensils and household food equipment,cleaning and disinfection).
7. Food consumer training.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
(Lectures in the classroom)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures are given as PowerPoint presentations, which are available together with supplementary educational material (i.e. course notes, bibliography – scientific papers) through moodle asynchronous e‐learning
platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform also, communication with the students is established via relevant announcements.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Workshop 3
Autonomous study 78
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
120
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work,
Students’ performance is evaluated through final written exam which includes:
‐ Multiple choice questionnaires (60% of total questions)
‐ Questions of True or False answer (30% of total questions)
‐ Short‐answer questions (10% of total questions)
The passing grade is ≥ 5.0 out of 10.0 in the final exam.
essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
FAO & WHO (2009). Codex Alimentarius: Food Hygiene, Basic Texts (4th edn.). Rome, Italy.
Kalogridou‐Vasileiadou, D. (1999). Good Hygiene Practice for food business (General, specific). Thessaloniki, Greece: University Studio Press (ISBN: 978‐960‐12‐0808‐4).
Mossel, D.A.A., Corry, J.E.L., Struijk, C.B., & Baird, R.M. (1995). Essentials of the microbiology of foods: A textbook for advanced studies. Chichester, England: John Wiley & Sons.
Papadopouloy, C. (2014). Food Microbiology & Hygiene (Methods of microbiological examination of foods). Athens, Greece: Kostarakis Publications, ISBN: 978‐960‐7530‐48‐6 (in Greek).
Vassos, D. V. (2004). Food and consumer health (Foodborne disorders). Athens, Greece: Papasotiriou Publications, ISBN: 978‐960‐7530‐48‐6 (in Greek).
FOOD LEGISLATION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3300 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE FOOD LEGISLATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I OR FOOD CHEMISTRY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/course/view.php?id=411
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The students will: 1. acquire the basic knowledge in Food Legislation2. have the ability to use the acquired knowledge in order to produce quality food products
according to food legislation
3. have all the required knowledge and skills in order to continue their studies.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
This module aims so that the degree‐holder will acquire the following cοmpetences: 1. critical thinking2. decision making3. problem handling
(3) SYLLABUS
Lectures: EU Legislation: Regulation (EC) 178/2002, Regulations regarding food hygiene, Regulations regarding contaminants in foods, Regulations regarding food additives, Regulation (EC) 1924/2006, Regulations regarding GMOs, Regulations regarding biological food products, Greek legislation.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐Face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer usage to conduct the lectures. Supporting the learning process through asynchronous e learning (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/)
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay
Activity Semester workload
lectures 39 Students’ study hours for lectures
111
Course total (30h/ECTS)
150 hours
writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Evaluation of students is performed by multiple choice‐questions in Greek language through a written final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1. EU Food Law: A Practical Guide, Kaarin Goodburn, 2001.
‐ Related academic journals:
DEGREE DISSERTATION
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENTACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3600 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE DEGREE DISSERTATION
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
SEMESTER HOURS
CREDITS
STUDY OF BIBLIOGRAPHY, LABORATORY RESEARCH, WRITING, PRESENTATION
450 15
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: 30 CORE COURSES AND 7 ELECTIVE COURSES
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Upon the successful completion of their Degree Dissertation Students will have acquired the skills to: • search for and find scientific information in scientific sources• design and organize research• conduct research
• process research data• evaluate and compare research data and results• write scientific texts• organize and present research data and results
Students after having successfully completed their Degree Dissertation also acquire specific knowledge in a particular scientific area.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
1. Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology
2. Adapting to new situations3. Decision‐making4. Working independently5. Team work6. Production of new research ideas7. Project planning and management8. Criticism and self‐criticism9. Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. Searching Bibliography2. Studying Bibliography3. Design an Experiment4. Performing Research5. Processing and evaluating research data6. Writing Degree Dissertation7. Presenting Degree Dissertation
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Search Scientific Bibliography (https://www.scopus.com/ ; http://apps.webofknowledge.com ) Communicating with students via email Multimedia presentation using presentation software
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Search for bibliography 20 Study of bibliography 30 Research design 30 Research 150 Process and evaluate research data
80
Presentation of the Degree Dissertation
20
Course total (30h/ECTS)
450
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The students are evaluated in Greek by oral presentation and written submission of their Degree Dissertation by a three‐member examination committee
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Student's Guide: Final Year Project Thesis: BSc, MSc, MA, and MBA. by Dr Fadi Safieddine (Author), Dr Koba Lomidze (Editor), CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 2nd Edition edition, 2015
‐ Related academic journals:
FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3450 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6
LABORATORY 2.5
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) http://www.fns.aegean.gr/index.php/27‐undergraduates‐
studies/program‐spoudon‐2014‐15/99‐syllabus‐biotexnologia
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Biotechnology refers to the exploitation of biological processes for industrial purposes. Food Biotechnology, more specifically, employs the genetic manipulation of microorganisms,
plants and animals for food production. It is an interdisciplinary subject that encompasses the sciences of Molecular Biology, Biomedicine as well as the genomics, proteomics, transcriptomics and metagenomics applications. Students who succeed in the Food Biotechnology course understand "classical Biotechnology", describe the main foods resulting from fermentation and the action of microorganisms responsible for food fermentations, analyze the "modern" Biotechnology, state the genetic processes that are responsible for the biological functions, but also how these processes lead to product development, identify key genetically modified food and describe in a broad sense the modern national and European legislation on food production, describe the concept of functional foods and their basic categories, and mention the main bioethical problems that arise from Biotechnology applications in the food industry.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of thenecessary technology
Decision‐making
Working independently
Team work
Production of new research ideas
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to genderissues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory: Introduction to Food Biotechnology (recombinant DNA and genetically modified organisms). Classical / modern Biotechnology. DNA: The basis of Biotechnology. Basics about the structure and function of DNA. Basic principles of DNA replication, transcription. Translation of RNA into protein. Post‐translational modifications of proteins. Recombinant DNA technology. Restriction enzymes. DNA cloning vectors and protein expression vectors – their features and properties. Insertion of DNA into a host – cloning of genes. Cloning. Libraries (cDNA, genomic, random mutations). Main recombinant DNA techniques (isolation, electrophoresis, DNA hybridization and Southern blotting). DNA sequencing. Modern applications of ‐omics technologies in Food Biotechnology. Microbial Biotechnology. Isolation, culture and use of microorganisms. Industrial fermentations.
Applications and products of Microbial Food Biotechnology. Plant and animal Biotechnology. Genetically modified plants in food production. Modern approaches to the detection of raw materials or food from genetically modified organisms. Legal framework for the production of genetically modified organisms and foodstuff (national / European). Ethical issues of Food Biotechnology. Practical: Laboratory exercises aiming at familiarizing students with the detection of genetically modified organisms (GMOs) and cloning of DNA sequences in Escherichia coli (DH5α strain):
1. DNA extraction from food using spin columns.2. PCR for the detection of genetically modified organisms (GMOs) in food.3. Use of restriction enzymes used in Molecular Biology. Enzymatic Digestion of plasmidDNA. 4. Explanation of the main features of a cloning vector. Selection of a suitable cloningvector for a particular technique. 5. TA cloning of a PCR product into a suitable plasmid vector.6.Transformation of competent E. coli bacteria (DH5α strain) with a recombinant plasmid.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with students
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Laboratory exercises 32.5
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 88.5
Course total (30h/ECTS)
180 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or
Language of evaluation: Greek Methods of evaluation: Open‐ended questions Written work (optional)
conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
BOOK TITLE: Modern Food Biotechnology (in Greek) ISBN: 978‐960‐489‐108‐5 AUTHOR: Batrinou A. PUBLISHER: Medical Publications I.X. Pasxalidis. YEAR OF PUBLISHING: 2010 LOCATION OF PUBLISHING: Athens
MANAGEMENT AND EXPLOITATION OF FOOD BY-PRODUCTS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3700 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE MANAGEMENT AND EXPLOITATION
OF FOOD BY‐PRODUCTS INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES
if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD MICROBIOLOGY I
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomesThe course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is to provide basic knowledge related with the politics and the scientific methodologies of management and valorization of food industry by‐products and wastes. Particular emphasis is given to avoiding dumping of by‐products and wastes generated during processing and consumption, in order to contain environmental aggravation. Furthermore, strategies and methodologies for residue exploitation which aim
at the production of high value‐added products are presented and analysed.
Following successful attendance of the course, the students will be in position to:
Understand basic principles of food industry waste management
Understand state‐of‐the‐art trends in food industry waste management
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
(3) SYLLABUS
Waste definition and categories; Quantitative characteristics of food industry liquid wastes; Technologies for management and processing of liquid wastes; Food industry gas wastes; Food industry solid wastes; Current situation – Introduction to environmental management systems; Case studies; Waste management and minimization; Plant food wastes; Upgrading and value‐added products; Recovery of high value‐added substances from food wastes; Organic acid production; Wine industry wastes; Olive oil industry wastes; Whey utilisation.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face. In laboratory courses, following a short
presentation of methodology, students perform
exercises using appropriate instruments/devices.
Furthermore, students practice scientific writing by
composing assays, in which they present and analyse
experimental results.
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures are supported by overhead projections and other audio material.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lecture attendance 39
Autonomous Study 81
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
The evaluation language is Greek. The final grade comprises of the written exam score, which includes assay questions and multiple‐choice questions.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Kioseoglou I., Blekas V., 2010. Principles of Food Technology, GARTAGANIS editions, GREECE.
NUTRITION POLICIES AND PUBLIC HEALTH
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIROMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE & NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 5150 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE NUTRITION POLICIES AND PUBLIC HEALTH
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
SKILLS DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE COURSES: INTRODUCTION TO NUTRITION SCIENCE
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of nutrition policies with aim to promote public health, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of public health nutrition. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to both qualified and non‐specialized people about public health nutrition. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on nutrition policies for the promotion of public health, which implies a critical understanding of theories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solve complex and unpredictable problems in the field of nutrition policies implementation for chronic diseases’ prevention and health promotion. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutrition advice relevant to public health promotion.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aim at: Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about public
health nutrition science, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations about public health nutrition science Decision‐making relative to public health nutrition issues Working independently Team work about public health nutrition Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to
gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Introductory Course, Basic Public Health Principles Focusing on Public Health and Nutrition, Food Choices, Nutritional Policies for Interventions at the Individual Level, Nutritional Policies for Community Level Interventions, Nutritional Policies for Population Interventions, Nutritional Recommendations, Epidemics and Infectious Diseases, Malnutrition, Obesity, Nutrition and Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease, Diabetes, Neurodegenerative Diseases and Cancer.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face to face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Computer, mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc.
The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures 39 Study 81
Course total (30ECTS/h)
120
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure
Assessment of the course is done through a written examination (multiple choice and critical thinking questions).
Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Sari Edelstein, Nutrition in Public Health, 3rd Edition, Jones & Bartlett Learning, LLC, 2010.
Arlene Spark, Nutrition in Public Health: Principles, Policies, and Practice, 1st Edition Taylor & Francis, CRC Press, 2007.
‐ Related academic journals: Public Health Nutrition
Journal of Health, Population and Nutrition
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF FOODBORNE DISEASES
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT
ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 4300 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE EPIDEMIOLOGY OF FOODBORNE DISEASES
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
LECTURES, WORKSHOPS & TEAM ASSIGNMENT 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (4).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/login/index.php
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The course’s main objective is the comprehension by the students of the key principles and concepts of Epidemiology related to Public Health and the human diseases caused through food consumption. The course also aims to familiarize the students with the measures of occurrence for the foodborne diseases of microbial aetiology, as well as with the monitoring
and control of the microbial foodborne pathogens. In particular, this course is orientated to the study of the frequency, distribution and evolution of diseases related to food consumption, and the characteristics of these diseases.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology
Decision‐making
Team work
Working in an international environment
Working in an interdisciplinary environment
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
1. Introduction to Epidemiology with key principles and concepts related to Public
Health and Food Hygiene – Terms and definitions. 2. Hazards (biological, chemical, physical) – Classification of foodborne diseases
(foodborne infections, intoxinations, intoxications). 3. Characteristics of infectious agents (infectivity, pathogenicity, virulence,
immunogenicity, resistance) – Measures of occurrence for the foodborne diseases: morbidity rates (prevalence, incidence), mortality rate and case fatality rate, attack rates, comparison between morbidity rates (direct and indirect standardization).
4. Epidemiological data of foodborne diseases – Assessing the impact of foodborne diseases (DALYs, QALYs) – Modern trends and emerging hazards, future challenges in Epidemiology.
5. Summary of foodborne diseases: Causative agent (hazard), pathogenesis, disease symptoms, pathogen reservoir, implicated foods, microbiological food control (laboratory diagnosis, prevention and treatment of disease). Major foodborne diseases of microbial aetiology – Bacterial infections (e.g. salmonellosis, listeriosis, campylobacteriosis) – Bacterial intoxinations (e.g. staphylococcal food poisoning, botulism) – Foodborne viral diseases (Norwalk virus, Rotavirus and epidemiologically related enteric viruses).
6. Standard methods for the detection of foodborne pathogenic microorganisms –
Phenotypic and molecular identification methods (e.g. PFGE, RAPD, rep‐PCR, MLST) of bacterial foodborne pathogens.
7. Risk analysis and risk assessment of a foodborne disease. 8. Design and implementation of procedures to investigate a foodborne disease
outbreak – Epidemic curves.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
(Lectures in the classroom)
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Lectures are given as PowerPoint presentations, which are available together with supplementary educational material (i.e. course notes, bibliography – scientific papers) through moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform also, communication with the students is established via relevant announcements.
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures Course 39
Essays 20
Practical Exercises 10
Autonomous Study 51
Course total (30 h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation
Ι. Final written exam (70%) which includes:
‐ Multiple choice questionnaires (60% of total questions)
‐ Questions of True or False answer (30% of total questions)
‐ Short‐answer questions (10% of total questions)
ΙΙ. Team Assignment (30%)
‐ Word text ‐ PowerPoint presentation
Unless a minimum grade of 3.5 out of 10.0 is achieved, the assignment cannot be calculated to the final course grade. If the student fails to the written exam, he/she
criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
can keep the grade of the assignment, after properly and timely declaring this, which is always before the next examination takes place. In any case, the passing grade is ≥ 5.0 out of 10.0.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Balatsouras, G. (2006). Food Microbiology (2nd edn.). Embryo Publications, ISBN: 960‐8002‐25‐7 (in Greek).
Brimer, L. (2011). Chemical food safety. CABI Publishing, UK, ISBN‐13: 978 1 84593 676 1.
Cliver, D.O., & Riemann, H.P. (2002). Foodborne diseases (2nd edn.). Academic Press, UK, ISBN 0‐12‐176559‐8.
D'Mello, J.P.F. (2003). Food safety: contaminants and toxins. CABI Publishing, UK, ISBN: 0851996078.
Drosinos, E.H., Paramithiotis S., & Andritsos N. (2011). Microbial foodborne pathogens. In L.M.L. Nollet & F. Toldrà (Eds.), Handbook of analysis of edible animal by‐products (Chapter 13, pp. 219‐237). Boca Ratton, FL: CRC Press.
IAFP (International Association for Food Protection). (2011). Procedures to investigate foodborne illness (6th edn.). New York, NY: Springer.
Jay, J.M., Loessner, M.J., & Golden D.A. (2005). Modern food microbiology (7th edn.). New York, NY: Springer.
Lasky, T. (2007). Epidemiologic principles and food safety. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, Inc.
Mossel, D.A.A., Corry, J.E.L., Struijk, C.B., & Baird, R.M. (1995). Essentials of the microbiology of foods: A textbook for advanced studies. Chichester, England: John Wiley & Sons.
Papadopouloy, C. (2014). Food Microbiology & Hygiene (Methods of microbiological examination of foods). Kostarakis Publications, ISBN: 978‐960‐7530‐48‐6 (in Greek).
Schmidt, R., & Rodrick, G.E. (2003). Food safety handbook. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Simjee, S. (2007). Foodborne diseases. Totowa, NJ: Humana Press Inc.
Trichopoulos, D. (2004). Epidemiology: Principles, methods, applications. Parisianos Scientific Publications, ISBN: 960‐394‐147‐6 (in Greek).
Vassos, D. V. (2004). Food and consumer health (Foodborne disorders). Papasotiriou Publications, ISBN: 978‐960‐7530‐48‐6 (in Greek).
‐ Related academic journals:
Bolton, D.J., & Robertson, L.J. (2016). Mental health disorders associated with foodborne pathogens. Journal of Food Protectio Mead, P.S., Slutsker, L., Dietz, V., McCaig, L.F., Bresee, J.S., Shapiro, C., Griffin, P.M., & Tauxe, R.V. (1999). Food‐related illness and death in the United States. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 5, 607‐625.
Galanis, P. & Sparos, L. (2005). Measures of disease occurrence. Archives of Hellenic Medicine, 22, 178‐191.
Mead, P.S., Slutsker, L., Dietz, V., McCaig, L.F., Bresee, J.S., Shapiro, C., Griffin, P.M., & Tauxe, R.V. (1999). Food‐related illness and death in the United States. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 5, 607‐625.
Scallan, E., Hoekstra, R.M., Angulo, F.J., Tauxe, R.V., Widdowson, M.‐A., Roy, S.L., Jones, J.L. & Griffin, P.M. (2011). Foodborne illness acquired in the United States– Major pathogens. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 17, 7‐15.
Scallan, E., Griffin, P.M., Angulo, F.J., Tauxe, R.V., & Hoekstra, R.M. (2011). Foodborne Illness acquired in the United States—Unspecified agents. Emerging Infectious Diseases, 17, 16‐22.
FUNCTIONAL FOODS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 3900 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE FUNCTIONAL FOODS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: ΝΟ
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL) https://eclass.aegean.gr/courses/FNS149/
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Learning outcomes At the end of the course the students can: • Have proven knowledge and understanding of functional foods, backed up by advancedscience textbooks, including views emerging from modern developments at the cutting edge of the cognitive field of nutrition. • They are able to use the knowledge they have acquired in a way appropriate to practicing
the profession of the Food and Nutrition Scientist and have the skills they typically demonstrate through problem solving and functional foods production. • They are able to communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions to bothqualified and non‐specialized people about functional foods. Knowledge and skills At the end of the course the student may: • Has advanced knowledge on functional foods, which implies a critical understanding oftheories and principles. • Has advanced skills and has the ability to demonstrate the innovation required to solvecomplex and unpredictable problems in the field of functional foods. • Takes responsibility for professional of individuals and groups by providing nutritionadvice, suggesting functional foods.
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
The course aims at:
Connecting ancient nutrition with food science
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information about nutrition scienceand functional foods, with the use of the necessary technology
Adapting to new situations about functional foods
Decision‐making relative to nutrition issues and functional foods
Working independently
Team work about functional foods
Working in an international environment
Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management
Respect for the natural environment
Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to genderissues
Criticism and self‐criticism
Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Nutritional Value of Food. Nutrition and Health Correlation: A holistic approach to nutrition: Nutritional value of food and nutritional standards. Nutrition and prevention of cardiovascular diseases, metabolic syndrome, diabetes and cancer. Bioavailability and
bioavailability of food nutrients. Functional Foods, Bio‐Functional Ingredients and Health Promotion: Introduction to Functional Foods: Definition, categorization, role, development and dissemination. Procedures for the development and entry of marketable functional foods: Safety, bioavailability and bioactivity studies. The Legislative Framework of Functional Foods: Nutrition and Health Claims. Approval procedures for functional foods. The antioxidant components of nutrition and their role in health. Probiotic foods and prevention of degenerative diseases. Vegetable fiber: Effect on the prevention of diabetes and cardiovascular disease. The effect of monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fatty acids on health. The beneficial effects of olive oil and fish on health. The effect of phytosterols on reducing the risk of developing cardiovascular diseases. The Importance of Bioactive Peptides for Health. Functional foods and neurodegenerative diseases. Functional foods, phytochemicals and cancer.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Computer, mail, e‐class platform
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Essays 20
Autonomous Study 61
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions,
Assessment of the course is done through a final examination and through a teamwork assessment. The aim of the work is the pilot production of an innovative functional food and its presentation in the course. The participation of the written examination in the final mark is 65% and the evaluation of the work 35%. Both grades (written examination and team work) should be greater than or equal to 5.0.
problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other
Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
Biesalski H‐K., Dragsted L., Elmadfa I., Grossklaus R., ller M., Schrenk D., Walter P. & Weber P. (2009). Bioactive compounds: Safety and efficacy. Nutrition, 25, 1206–1211
Bigliardia Β. & Galatib F. (2013). Innovation trends in the food industry: The case of functional foods.Trends in Food Science & Technology, 31, 118‐129.
Coppens P., Da Silva M.F. & Pettman S. (2006). European regulations on nutraceuticals, dietary supplements and functional foods:a framework based on safety Toxicology, 221:59‐74
Duthie G.G., Duthie SJ., & Kyle, A.M. (2000). Plant polyphenols in cancer and heart disease: implications as nutritional antioxidants. Nutrition Research Reviews, 13(1), 340‐357.
Goetzke B., Nitzko S., Spiller A. (2014). Consumption of organic and functional food. A matter of well‐being and health? Appetite 77, 94–103.
‐ Related academic journals:
Journal of Functional Foods Journal of Nutrition International Journal of Nutrition
APICULTURE AND BEEHIVE PRODUCTS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 5200 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLE APICULTURE AND BEEHIVE PRODUCTS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give
the weekly teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 6 LABORATORIES 2
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background, special background, specialised general
knowledge, skills development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: FOOD CHEMISTRY 1
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NON
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle,
according to the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education
Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for
Lifelong Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
Aim of this course is to help students explore and learn the honeybee society in theory and in practice. Students will comprehend the important contribution of honeybee products to human nutrition and health as well as the crucial impact of honeybees to the environmental equilibrium and biodiversity maintenance, through pollination. Theory lessons cover biology and behaviour of honeybees as well as the structure and function of the honeybee colony as a "superorganism". Furthermore, students will learn applied apiculture with emphasis on seasonal manipulations in order to optimize the production of qualitative beehive products. Bee pathology will also be a subject of training aiming at the control of bee pests without chemical treatments and pesticides residues on bee products. Παρέχεται γενική γνώση για την παθολογία και την αντιμετώπιση εχθρών και ασθενειών του μελισσιού με στόχο την παραγωγή προϊόντων χωρίς χημικά κατάλοιπα. Beehive products will also be studied. Laboratorial exercises are designed to help students better understand the honeybee colony through apicultural manipulations, honeybee products production and their qualitative control. General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
Decision‐making Working independently Team work Production of new research ideas Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Environmental sensitivity Production of free, creative and inductive thinking
(3) SYLLABUS
Theory. 1. General aspects of Apiculture. The role of bees in relation to human nutrition, pollination and agricultural production, preservation of biodiversity and the environment. Prospects and problems of Apiculture in Greece. 2. Origin and taxonomy of bees. 3. Species and subspecies. 4. The hive and its habitants: morphology of worker, drone and queen. 5. Anatomy of worker, drone and quuen. 6. The hive as a super‐organism. Interactions and communication within the hive. 7. Colony development during the year. 8. Management practices during the year. 9. Queen rearing. 10. Bee pathology, enemies and diseases. 11. The honey: composition, biological importance and properties. 12. Production of superior quality honey. 13. Other hive products: pollen, royal jelly, propolis, wax, poison. Laboratory practicals 1. Bee morphology (stereoscopy). 2. Bee anatomy (microscopy). 3. Morphometrics, taxonomy of bees. Proboscis Extension Reflex. 4. Getting familiar with the hive 5. Inspections and best practices. 6. Honey harvesting and standardization. 7. Honey analysis. 8. Melissopalinology. 9. Test sampling of honey. 10. Basic analysis of propolis.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERY Face‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education,
communication with students
Lectures (Theory and Laboratory) are done using PowerPoint presentations. All course notes are available to students at the moodle asynchronous e‐learning platform (https://aegeanmoodle.aegean.gr/). Through this platform, communication with students is also made (announcements).
TEACHING METHODS The manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures 39 Laboratory Exercises 26 Autonomous study 115
Course total (30 hours of workload per unit of credit)
180
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Student evaluation is done through final written examinations → Ques ons are in the form of: multiple choice (1 question with 4 possible
answers, of which only one answer is correct), Short‐answer questions. Laboratory is examined independently of the theory of the course, while the final grade of the laboratory participates by 30% in the final grade of the course. A graduate grade (≥5) is required both in theory and in the laboratory so that a student can be considered successful in the class. If one student succeeds in one of the two (theory, laboratory) then the next time (whenever) is examined only in what he/she failed. It is also possible for a student to be examined in the theory in 2 separate examinations → A 'and B' progress. In order to pass the theory through the 2 progressions it must have received at each degree ≥ 5. In this case, the final degree of the theory results from the average of the grades of 2 progressions. If a student fails to progress (and/or if he/she wishes to improve degree), he/she still has the right to be examined in the theory in the final exam.
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography: 1. Contemporary Apiculture. Practice and Theory. (In Greek). Author: M. Ifantidis Editor: Greek Apicultural Review. 2. Bee Pathology. Alternative Methods of Control. (In Greek). Author: M. Ifantidis Editor: Greek Apicultural Review. 3. Applied Apicultire. (In Greek). Author: A. Trasivoulou Editor: Greek Apicultural Review. ‐ Related academic journals: 1. Journal of Apicultural Research
(https://www.tandfonline.com/toc/tjar20/current)
2. Apidologie (https://link.springer.com/journal/13592)
COURSE OUTLINE
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND
NUTRITION LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE
COURSE CODE 4250 SEMESTER 8th
COURSE TITLEBUSINESS PLANNING FOR START UP
AGRI‐FOOD SMES
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
Instruction Language: Greek Examination Language: Greek Case Studies Language: English
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The module aims to enable students to develop a holistic understanding of the challenges and opportunities which new businesses bring, working in the team settings frequently found in business contexts; to help them develop an understanding of team dynamics and to put
that understanding to work synthesising the functional foundations of business knowledge (e.g. marketing, finance, strategy, operations and law) into a coherent and unified formal document – the Business Plan; and to give students an opportunity to develop self‐directed learning strategies, not least through developing an ability to reflect on the entrepreneurial process, team dynamics and personal development. Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to: Critically discuss and analyse the concepts of formulating a Business Plan Demonstrate an ability to engage in entrepreneurial and innovation processes for new
product development and codifying these processes into a formal document – “The Business Plan” Create, analyse and critically evaluate new business models and innovation plans for new
ventures Interpret primary and secondary market research for a new business venture Assess the commercial feasibility of a new business venture Develop case study analysis skills (specifically, identifying critical issues in case studies and
applying course material to case studies
Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
By the end of the module students should be able to: understand the environment of the entrepreneur and business; undertake the business planning process and construct a business plan; understand how to justify and implement such plans, both at the idea generation stage (via an 'elevator pitch') and the plan implementation stage (via the group business plan). In addition, they will be able to understand the legal implications of different forms of business organization; have a critically aware understanding of the opportunities and challenges presented in the entrepreneurial process; demonstrate a more holistic understanding of major new venture creation challenges and how to apply concepts and theoretical understandings gained in addressing a practical problem scenario. Finally, students will be able to demonstrate skills in the articulation of communication strategies; demonstrate skills in self‐directed teamwork; communicate, negotiate and advocate ideas; and work effectively in teams in an virtual entrepreneurial setting
(3) SYLLABUS
This course teaches students how to estimate the market potential for their technologies and business ideas and learn how to build successful companies around them. It provides a rigorous and realistic experience in the process necessary to prepare a business plan that will
attract investors to a venture. The course will emphasize collection and organization of the fundamental information necessary to prove the viability of students’ business idea and establish that it can become a self‐sustaining company. There will be heavy emphasis on knowing the customers intimately; on careful analysis of all the potential competitors; and on understanding the external environment and how it can affect your business. Your products and support services should be designed around the customers’ needs and should use your strengths to develop a convincing competitive advantage. The plan must thoroughly explain how all these factors have been taken into consideration in designing your business strategy. Finally all these elements must be reflected in your financial projections.. This will enable students to deal successfully with dynamic demands from markets and customers that are becoming even more sophisticated and knowledgeable. The purpose of this module is to examine the theory and the practice of entrepreneurship and new business planning for both product and service oriented firms. Entrepreneurship is studied in terms of opportunity recognition, the process of new venture creation and the determinants of new venture success. Assessment is based on students’ participation in class on identifying a new business opportunity and preparing a plan and business pitch for a new business. The module is delivered through 12 weekly lectures. In each lecture a case study from a real venture is discussed. The cases are short enough to serve as illustrations, but have sufficient content to serve as the basis of the module. This course is designed to provide a comprehensive coverage of New Ventures Business Planning. Emphasis will be placed on both theory and implementation of Business Planning in order to elaborate on the challenges and opportunities that New Ventures bring. To enhance students awareness and comprehension of New Business Planning management challenges module themes and lectures have been allocated as follows: Part 1 Defining the New Venture Project, Environment & Beneficiaries Resource Assessment & Business Selection Part 2 Market Research Competitor Analysis Operational Sales & Marketing Plans Part 3 Management Structure Risk Analysis & Mitigation Finance – individual businesses (P&L, Cash flow, investment, production plan) Finance – institution (financial self‐sufficiency) Part 4 Integration of the business and education Action Plan – Telling your story well Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to have: • A very clear understanding of the business plan process and what is necessary to obtain funding for it. • A working knowledge of all the components of a business plan and how they should fit together to tell a compelling story. • An understanding of basic financial statements and how to use them to project future cash needs • The skills and confidence needed to present the plan to investors.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
Use of University’s e‐Learning platform for providing access to class material, lectures and case studies
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39 Essays 20 Autonomous study 61
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
This will be a highly interactive class, involving frequent presentation of findings to stimulate discussion and elicit constructive criticism from other students. Students will be graded on the contributions they make to other teams and plans during class. In addition to the independent research on the students’ own plans, there will be assigned readings to develop perspective on entrepreneurship, supplemented by real case studies. Students are required to develop and present the stages of their business plan to the class. The refined and critiqued version should be of sufficient quality to enter a business plan competition. Each student shall provide a Business Plan at the end of the semester. • Final Exam (test) comes to 60 % of final grade • Individual Business Plan that help to master theory of the course come to 30 % of final grade •Participation in class discussion comes to 10 % of final grade
(5)
‐ Suggested bibliography: (Basic Textbook) New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship for the 21st Century, 9th Edition, Spinelli Stephen and Adams Rob (2011), McGraw‐Hill Education (ISBN: 978‐0078029103) (Supplementary Textbooks) 1. Anatomy of a Business Plan: The Step‐by‐Step Guide to Building a Business and Securing Your Company's Future, Pinson, Linda, Small Business Strategies Series (2008) (ISBN: 978‐0944205372) 2. The Secrets to Writing a Successful Business Plan: A Pro Shares A Step‐by‐Step Guide to Creating a Plan That Gets Results, 2nd Edition. Shelton, Hall, Summit Valley Press (2017) (ISBN: 978‐0989946032) ‐ Suggested Academic Journals 1. Journal of Small Business and Enterprise Development, Emerald Insight 2. Journal of Small Business Management, Wiley Online Library 3. International Small Business Journal, SAGE Journals
MEDICINAL AND AROMATIC PLANTS
(1) GENERAL
SCHOOL SCHOOL OF THE ENVIRONMENT ACADEMIC UNIT DEPARTMENT OF FOOD SCIENCE AND NUTRITION
LEVEL OF STUDIES UNDERGRADUATE COURSE CODE 4100 SEMESTER 8th COURSE TITLE MEDICINAL AND AROMATIC PLANTS
INDEPENDENT TEACHING ACTIVITIES if credits are awarded for separate components of the
course, e.g. lectures, laboratory exercises, etc. If the credits are awarded for the whole of the course, give the weekly
teaching hours and the total credits
WEEKLY TEACHING HOURS
CREDITS
THEORY LECTURES 3 4
Add rows if necessary. The organisation of teaching and the teaching methods used are described in detail at (d).
COURSE TYPE general background,
special background, specialised general knowledge, skills
development
SPECIAL BACKGROUND
PREREQUISITE COURSES: NO
LANGUAGE OF INSTRUCTION and EXAMINATIONS:
GREEK
IS THE COURSE OFFERED TO ERASMUS STUDENTS
NO
COURSE WEBSITE (URL)
(2) LEARNING OUTCOMES
Learning outcomes The course learning outcomes, specific knowledge, skills and competences of an appropriate level, which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described.
Consult Appendix A
Description of the level of learning outcomes for each qualifications cycle, according to
the Qualifications Framework of the European Higher Education Area
Descriptors for Levels 6, 7 & 8 of the European Qualifications Framework for Lifelong
Learning and Appendix B
Guidelines for writing Learning Outcomes
The aim of the course is the understanfing of the valu and properties of medicinal/aromatic/dietary plants with respect to their chemical content, biological action and isolation methods. Students will acquire knowledge and perception on the history of pharmacognosy and the use of medicinal plants as therapeutic tools. They will also be familiar with secondary metabolites and their isolation from medicinal plants. Moreover, emphasis will be given to dietary plants of the Mediterranean diet and the development of food
supplements via international regulatory bodies
General Competences Taking into consideration the general competences that the degree‐holder must acquire (as these appear in the Diploma Supplement and appear below), at which of the following does the course aim?
Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology Adapting to new situations Decision‐making Working independently Team work Working in an international environment Working in an interdisciplinary environment Production of new research ideas
Project planning and management Respect for difference and multiculturalism Respect for the natural environment Showing social, professional and ethical responsibility and sensitivity to gender issues Criticism and self‐criticism Production of free, creative and inductive thinking …… Others… …….
‐ Search for, analysis and synthesis of data and information, with the use of the necessary technology ‐ Working independently ‐Team work ‐ Working in an interdisciplinary environment
(3) SYLLABUS
‐ History sources and folk medicine: Introduction to ancient tests and sources for the therapeutic potential of herbs. Greek and Roman writers. Influence in Arab and Medieval texts. Transition to modern pharmacognosy.
‐ Secondary metabolites and isolation: Natural product chemistry. Chemical categories – secondary metabolites. Extraction methodologies. Isolation methodologies.
‐ Aromatic plants: Popular aromatic plants of Greece. Economic importance, biodiversity and restrictions. Kozani saffron. Mountain tea. Dittany. Endemic plants. Phytochemical profile.
‐ Medicinal plants: Popular medicinal plants of Greece. Hypericum perforatum. Cistus creticus. Greek paeonies. Alkanna. Aloe. Echinacea. Phytoestrogens and legumes. Mastic. Canabbis. Pacific pine and taxol. Artemisia and artemisinin. Atropa and atropine.
‐ Mediterranean diet and dietary/edible plants: The value of Mediterranean diet. Cretan diet. Epidemiology studies and the consumption of olive oil and wild greens. The olive tree, table olives and olive oil. Chemistry and biology. Olive oil phenols and health. Olive leaves. Green leafy vegetables. Bioactive molecules from chicory and other wild greens. Their antioxidant potential. Traditional use.
‐ European regulatory bodies and development of food supplements/functional foods. ΡEuropean Medicines Agency (EMA). European Food Safety Agency (EFSA). Health claims. Monographs. Scientific support on health claims. Reviews. Panels of specialists.
Safety of phytotherapeutics. Herbs/plants possessing interest for Greece that are included in EMA monographs.
(4) TEACHING and LEARNING METHODS ‐ EVALUATION
DELIVERYFace‐to‐face, Distance learning,
etc.
Face‐to‐face
USE OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY Use of ICT in teaching, laboratory education, communication with
students
TEACHING METHODSThe manner and methods of teaching are described in detail. Lectures, seminars, laboratory practice, fieldwork, study and analysis of bibliography, tutorials, placements, clinical practice, art workshop, interactive teaching, educational visits, project, essay writing, artistic creativity, etc. The student's study hours for each learning activity are given as well as the hours of non‐directed study according to the principles of the ECTS
Activity Semester workload
Lectures attendance 39
Autonomous study 81
Course total (30h/ECTS)
120 hours
STUDENT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Description of the evaluation procedure Language of evaluation, methods of evaluation, summative or conclusive, multiple choice questionnaires, short‐answer questions, open‐ended questions, problem solving, written work, essay/report, oral examination, public presentation, laboratory work, clinical examination of patient, art interpretation, other Specifically‐defined evaluation criteria are given, and if and where they are accessible to students.
Student performance evaluation is performed in Greek, with written exams in June or September, with multiple choice questionnaires or/and short answer questions and/or open ended questions (80%), and written assay in the course of the semester (20%).
(5) ATTACHED BIBLIOGRAPHY
‐ Suggested bibliography:
1) Drugs of natural origin, Gunnar Samuelson, 2005, University of Crete Publishing, ISBN: 960‐524‐015‐7
2) Pharmacognosy, Christos Souleles, 2000, Pegasus, ISBN: 960‐317‐052‐6 3) Pharmacognosy, Phytochemistry, Medicinal Plants; Jean Bruneton, 1999, Lavoisier,
ISBN: 1898298637 4) Natural product chemistry, Ignatiadou‐Ragousi Valentini, 2009, Symmetry, ISBN: 978‐
960‐266‐257‐1 5) Natural product chemistry at a glance; Stephen P. Stanforth, 2006, Blackwell
Publishing, ISBN: 1‐4051‐4562‐5 6) Natural products extraction: principles and applications; 2013, RSC publishing, ISBN:
978‐1‐84973‐606‐0 7) Olive and olive bioactive constituents; 2015, Elsevier, ISBN: 9781630670412
‐ Related academic journals: 1. Journal of Natural Products, ACS Publications, ISSN: 1520‐6025 (Online) 2. Phytochemistry, Elsevier, ISSN: 0031‐9422 3. Journal of Ethnopharmacology, Elsevier, ISSN: 0378‐8741